Bengelius's introduction to his exposition of the Apocalypse : with his preface to that work and the greatest part of the conclusion of it; and also his marginal notes on the text, which are a summary of the whole exposition

BENGELIUS^

INTRODUCTION

T O H IS

Expofition of the Apocalypfe:

WITH HIS

PREFACE to that WORK,

And the greateft Part of
THE CONCLUSION OF ITl

... And alfo his Marginal Notes on the Text,

WKICH ARE

A Summary of the whole Exposition.
Translated from the High-Dutch

By JOHN ROBERTSON, M. D.

LONDON:

Sold by J. Ryall and R. W^'^hy, at Hogarth's Head
and Dial oppofite to Salifbury-Court, Fket-Jireet^

M.DCC.LVII,

THE

TRANS LAT 0 R's

PREFACE.

TN the Propofah for printing the enfiiing
Treatife I declared my high opinion of the
merit of the Author^ and the Grounds of it 5
and my Defgn in piiblijhing in our la^iguage
this Specimen of his Works ^ that as a tafte //
may whet the readers appetite after the reft of
them : of which therefore it will be proper to
give here afjort Account.

The pious Author propofed to himfelf one.
principal Defign in his Studies -, in the Exe-
cution of which he employed moji a?id the bejl
years of his life^ and laid out on it the talents
God had enriched him with — a great Saga-*
city, ^/J^/W Judgment, and an indefatigable
Induftiy, and all thefock of ujefid Knowlege
he had acquired by the prudent ufe of thefe.
This Defign was^ to illuftrate the New

iv. PREFACE.

Testament, not barely by Jhewing thefenfe
mid meaning of thofef acred writings , but alfi
the grandeur andmajejiy of the Sentiments, and
the dignity afid beauty of the Expreffion in a
Stile venerably fimple a?id delicately affeBing.

For this pw'pofe^ he judicioufiy obfervedy a
correifl Copy of the f acred writings was necef-
fary in the fir fl place: which he accordingly
prepared for himfelf, by 7nany years fiudy in
examining and digefting into order (which he
has done with a clearnefs and hcility that could
fcarcely have been hoped for) the vafi colleBions
ofhispredecejjors, efpecially Dr, MilVs, and his
own from MSS, which they had notfeen 5 and
publiped it for the benefit of others at Tubing
A\ 1734, in %%j!^ pages in 4'° (of which the
"text takes up ^t^ii) 'with the following title :

I. H KAINH AIA0HKH. NovUM Tes-
TAMENTUM GR-3iCUM, ita adomatum ut
Textus probatarum editionum medullam,
Margo variantium leftionum in fuas clafles
diftributarum, locprumque parallelorum de-
le6lum, Apparatus fuhjunBiis crifeos facrse,
Millianac prsefertim, compendium, limam,
fupplementum ac fruftum exhibeat; infer-
yiente fo, Alberto Bengelio.

PREFACE. V.

The fame year he publified, at Stiitgardy
an 8'° Edition of the Text and marginal
VARIOUS READINGS and parallel places^ but
without the critical Apparatus : which I have
not been able to procure^ though dejirous to have
it as a Curiojity in its kind, as having but one
error of the prefix viz^ a wrong accent on the
word i^ocKs^onxvy I Cor, xvi. 5, vid. Gnom. in
locum. He had alfo begun a fecond S''*

edition^ entirely the fame ^ in the Text, with
the two former y but a little different in the
Margin as to the Greek letters oi, p, y, ^, £,
one of which in all his editions he puts after
each various reading to fgnify his approbation
or difapprobation and the degree of it f^ the
hefty £ the worjl, y doubtfid) ; fome of which
are here alter d^ efpecially y into |3 or ^, after
1 8 years time for farther enquiry. He did not
live to fee this finifbed. It came out at Tzibing^
A\ 1753, in ^g 5 pages. In the preface

to this 3'' edition he mentions a I'reatife he had
by him ready for the prefs and would foon pub-
lifhy viz. CLAvifcuLA N. Test. Grjeci
ex iteratd hacce recognitione editi^ quae et
generalia fundamenta crifeos N. T. ita repe«
tit, ut noviflimas exceptioncs prascidantur, t^.

vi. PREFACE.

ad mxAt^fngidatim loca N. T. refiduis unius
alteriufve eruditi viri oppofitionibus fafisfacit,
alienafque corrediones, meafque curas ulte-
riores adjicit. / am but very lately informed
that this trcatife is printed^ and has been fold at
London : fo that I have not yet had an oppor^
tunity offeeijig a work the title of which and the
charadler ofifs Author raife my expeBatiort
high.

The next tlmig to be done was to comtnuni-^
cate the Obfervations he had for many years
been making on the Scriptures of the New Tef
tament, But^ in order to avoid interruptions
and digrefions in that work^ and to attain in
it the utmoji Brevity^ of which he is ever ftudi-
cus that the attention of the reader may not be
diverted from the I'ext itfelf \ he put the ge^
neral things^ that related to many particular
texts^ into two fmall Treatifes ; the iirft of
which is a new Harmony of the Evangeliftsy
which he wrote in High Dutch a?id publifed
at T^ubing A\ 1736, in 'i()o pages in 8'* with
this Hitle

II. JoHANN Albrecht Bengels richtige
Harmonie der vier &c: /. e. An exacl Har-
mony of the four Evangelists, in which the

P R E F A C E. vii.

Sijioryy the Works and the Words of Jesus
Christ our Lord are difpofed in their proper
natural Order, for confirmation of the truths
and for exercife and edification in piety : by
John Albert Bengel. With a Preface &c.

The fecond of thefe two is the Chrono-
logy, not only of the New^ but alfo of the Old
T^efiamenty nay of all ages ^^Sifrom the Cre-
ation^ and future //// the end of time : afingu-
lar and furprifing work, and well worthy of the
Attention both of the pious and of the learned;
which was printed at Stutgard A\ ij^iy in
/^^i pages in 8'*, entitled

IIL ]q. Albert! Bengelij Ordo Tempo-
rum, d Principio per Periodos oeconomiae
divinse hiiloricas atque propheticas, ad Finem
ufque ita deduftus ut tota Series & quarumvis
Partium Analogia fempiternse virtutis ac
fapientiae cultoribus ex Scripturd veteris et
novi T'efiamenti^ tanquam uno revera docu-
mento, proponatur.

But before this lafi mentioned book he thought
it proper to publijh his Expofition of the Re-
velation, becaufe in the Introduction to it
(which is the enfuing I'raB) he had eftablifhed
a main principle of his Chrofiology^ efpecially

vlii. PREFACE.

of future times : which he did accordingly y A",
1740 at Stutgard in 1 162 pages in 8'" under
the following T'itle,

IV. Erklarte Offenbarung &c, /. e.
An Exposition of the Revelation of.
St, John, or rather c/' Jesus Christ, tran-
i[2.ttdi from the original 'Text revifedj opened l?y
means of the prophetical Numbers ^ and offered
to the coniideration of all that regard the
Work and the Word of the IjORB, and defre to
he rightly prepared yir thofe Occurrences that
are near at hand: by John Albert Bengel.

The Author himf elf (in §.177 of his Abrifs^
^c, to be fpoken of by and by) 77ientions a 1^
edition of this work^ A"' 1 746 ; in which he
has brief y confuted the Moravians Mifapplica-^
tion of the excellent things f aid of the Church of
Philadelphia to the Church of the Brethren as
they call it^ and the perfevering cppofition they
make to the right ufe of the Revelation^ in p.
1163— 1172. But thefe i o pages feem^ by their
numbers following im?nediately after the laft
(viz, the 1 162V page of the Booky to be a
feparate Appendix not interwoven into the body
of the work 'y the 2^ edition of which y as it con-
fijis of the fame number of pages as thefirf^ one

PREFACE. IX.

*would think JJdOuld not differ from it but in that
Appendix, Yet I was wiUi?ig to fee it^ and it
is near a twelvemonth ago that a German Book-
feller at Lofidon was employ d to get it for me :
but I have not feen it yet, I had patience with
another of them two years in procuring me fome
other of our Authors works-, and at lajl had
them by other means. This diffculty or ncgli'-
gence I cannot account for : but it accounts for
fome defeBs of my narrative.

The laft Fart of the Work, and to which
the reji were preparatory, was a continued Se-
ries of Obfervations or Annotations on all the
books of the New Teftament. It was printed
at Tubifig A\ 1742, in 1208 pages in 4'%
with the following Title y

V. Gnomon * Novi Testamenti, In
quo, ex nativa verborum vi, Simplicitas,

B

* The Author's Defign being to point out in the briefeft
manner the Emphafis, the Beauty, the Method of the Text,
without taking off the reader's attention from the Text itfelf ;
he would have called it an Index of the N. T. But being pre-
vented the ufe of a metaphor taken from that Jinger with
which we point at any thing (common ufage having affixed a
different meaning to Index when fpoken of a book) he bor-
rowed one from that part of a Sun-Dial that points out the
Hours, and from thence call'd his work a Gnomon to the
N. Tcft,

X. PREFACE.

Profunditas, Conclnnitas, Salubritas fenfuum
cseleftium indicatur, o^tviJo^AlbertiBengelij.

These are the fever al Parts of his princi-
pal Work, viz^ That oiz the New T'eflamejtt:
of which I have given no larger an account than
jufl to inform the Reader of the general defign of
them ; having reflrained my firong inclination
to give them fever ally their due praife, that I
might not anticipate his pleafiire in finding them
of much higher value than he can conceive from
any thing I have f aid of them.

As to his fmaller Works: — he publifhedy
before any of tlie above-mentioned^

1. St. Chrys OS Tom's Dialogue on the
Priesthood, in Greek and Latin, with Notes,
at T^ubing, A\ 1725, in 518 pages in 8'°.
In the preface to this is his Prodromus Novi
Teftamenti GrtJeci re6te cauteque adornandi,
or Propofals for printing the above-mentioned
critical edition of the Greek N, Tefiament, And

2. Gregorij Neoc^sariensis Pane-
gyric u s : which I have not feen.

As // is impofjible the fame work fJooidd uni-
verfally pleafe men of oppofite opinions andtafles-y
our Author was, after puhlifhing the N. Tefi.
attacked by two different forts of writers, fome

PREFACE. xi.

nccujing him of over-caution a?id timidity in
admittifjg the various readings of the MSS,
which differ from the common editions^ and o-
thers of too great forwardnefs and temerity in
receiving them : a good proof that he really
went in the right middle way avoiding both ex-
tremes. He vindicated himfelf againji both in
two Dissertations. I can add nothing
to what he fays himfelf concerning fome occa-
sional Pieces, iii §. iv of the eiifiiing Pre-
face : nor can I tell whether his German
Translation of the N. Test, mentionedin
§. III. of the fame has been publijhed. And

it little concerns our piirpofe that in \yi^ he
gave an edition of fome Part of "Tullys works.
3 . B u T ^ fmall Piece which he had written y
>4^ 1743, at the requeji of feveral friends who
were earnejlly defirous to have his opinion of
Coimt Zinzendorf and his Herrnhuters^ vizy
XX Remarks on the Church of the Bre-
thren fo called — this fmall Piece ^ I fay^ is
more worthy of our Notice ^ as it gave occafion
for his publijlnng afterward a more confiderable
work, vizy a larger a?2d fuller account ofthefe
people. 'T'he Remarks were not inte?tded for

xii. PREFACE.
the piiblick view; kit the Leaders of the Mo-
ravians (for the Count and his people pretend to
that Name^ and are commonly fo called among
us) having got a Copy of them^ at a Synod
which they held at Marienborn^ the Count wrote
his Obfervations on them^ and publijhed both
together, Bengelitis^ otberwife uf fully employ^
ed^ and ever averfe to the dif agreeable ofice of
difputing [that is, mofly of laying open that
chicane which many difputants artfully make
vfe of in order to prevent a controverfy from
being determined) declined publifhing any thing
more about the Moravians, 'till a fcandalous
report being propagated that he approved the
New-mor avian Scheme, or at leaf had engaged
himfelf to publip nothing more concerning ity
and finding the frequent Variations and new^
modellings of it were in a continual progrefsfrofn
had to worfe^ he determined to digefi in order
his obfervations and reflexions of many years on
the Moraviajis and their Caufe, and lay them
before the world. Accordingly he publijhed them
at Stutgard A\ 175 1, adding as an Appendix,
the afore-mentioned Remarks with the Count's
Obfervations on them and his own Reply to

PREFACE. xlii.
tbefey andfome other occaiional Papers relat-
ing to the fame fubjedt, The whole is contained
in 550 pages in S''' (whereof the Appendix
makes 96) under the following Title :

Abriss der fo genannten Bruderge-
MEiNE, in welchem &c. i. e, A Draught
OF THE Church of the Brethren as
they call it, in which their Do&ine is ex-
amined and their Caufe tried, the Good and
the Evil diflingidfhedy and particidarly Span-
genbergs Declaration and the Ordinary's
fliort and peremptory Thoughts are fet
in a clear lights by John Albert Bengel. The
Count was no fir anger to the CharaBer of our
Author^ and, even when he wrote his Obferva-
tions on the xx Remarks, prof effed a great Re-
fpeB for him, faying among his Frieiids, * O

* that this beloved f7tan woidd go on in this Ipirit

* to give a cenfure of my writings and princi-
^ pies \ to which our Docility might perhaps be
' a better anfwer than an explication by words*
He has now gratified this defire ; requiring, he

fays, no fubmifjive Docility, but earneflly wifld-
ing to be uffid, and ferioifly protefting that he
writes this Draught in the fame fpirit, of

XIV. PREFACE.

charity and loije of the truth, as he wrote the
Remarks, T^he Idea Bengelius had early form d
if the Ordinary, and in which many years obfer-
vationfill confirmed him, was, T'hat of a man
who had a mind to do our Saviour afervice i?i
fome extraordinary manner, and in whofe opin-
ion a good defign and meaning well made ^11
forts of methods lawful and fair. He believed
that the young Count began in the fpirit:
whether he believed the Ordinary ajtd his Bre-
thren went on foy or in a new way ef their
ewn, will plainly appear to the readers of this
Draught : in the file and manner of which he
expeBs that thofe who are throughly acquainted
with the whole affair, and are impartial, will
think he ought to have dealt more fharply with
the Moravians -, and that thofe who are not,
will judge he might have treated them more
gently : and to the tafte of thefe lafi, who are
hy far the greater number, be declares he has
adapted himfelf though many of them may per^
baps think otberwife.

Thus much may fuffice to give my reader a
general Notion of the Nature of thofe Writings
'which I would recommend to him, I hope to bis

PREFACE. XV.

great benefit. As to the outward Circum^

Jlances of the Authors life^ I cannot gratify the
reader s curiofity [for I have not been able to
gratfy my own) with ajiy account of them.

As to the prefent Work: f?ice the Revela-
tion contains a Prophecy of the ft ate of the
Chriftian Church through all ages ; it nearly
concerns every Chriftian rightly to underftand
ity in order to conduct himfelfin a manner fuit-
able to the particular time he lives in, and to
know in what part of the Prophecy that time
isfpoken of ^he whole Exposition of

the Apocalypfe is a very clear and well-fupported
Interpretation of the Meaning and Senfe of the
Prophecy^ and the enfuing Introduction to
it fettles the proper Time of every event foretold
in it : and from thence it appears that within
54 years from this prefent time^ many and
great Events'' and of the utmoft Importance to
every living Soul^ efpecially to Chriftians and
Jews, are to be expelled: fome of which cannot
be far off, if they are not already begun.
Let the People of thefe Nations take a fiber
view of the prefent ft ate of their wordly affairs,
and a fad andforrowful one of theftate ofK^-

^ Sec §. VII. of the lad Seftion of the Condufion.

wi. PREFACE.

ligion among us, where open and avowed Infi^
delity^ and its necejfary confequence a general
Corruption of Manners, is daily fpreading :
and then let them ferioujly bethink themf elves
(thofe of them who are not fo intoxicated as to
make a jeji of all ferious thinking) whereabout
they are, and what they have to expedt.

My looking upon thisfmall Treatife as a very
feafonable Admonition to the prefent and to
the rifing Generation, determined me to the
choice of it as a proper Sample of the ufeful and
edyfying Works of its Author. And lam there-
fore the more forry that it Jhould come out fo
much later than it was expelled and than I hoped
and believed it would. I folemnly declare that
I did not delay the publication of it fo much as
one day in order to increafe the number of Sub^
fcriptionSy after there werefo many as to anfwer
the purpofe mentioned in the Propofals, viz, to
fecure me from being a lofer by the undertaking,
I was indeed ready to put to the prefs all that
I had promifed in my Propofals [viz, the
Preface, the Introdudlion and the greater part
tfthe iii^ SeBion of the Conclufion; which
J computed would amount all together to 24*

PREFACE. xvii.

p^g^s] early in the Summer : but the Printer

was obliged to wait more than four months for

a new Letter (that I might exceed rather tbaji

falljljort of what I had engaged for) thd ex-

peBing it week after week. When at lajl the

work was begiin^ an accident in his affairs^

for which he is no ways to be blamed^ occafioned

a very fow prcgrefs in it at firjl, and much

Jicknefs retarded it after.

But perhaps the reader may have little caufe
to complain of the Delay : fnce I have employed
the leifure it gave me in adding (I hope^ for his
benefit) a T^ranfiation of the V\ IF, remainder
of the Iir, the IV^' andMlV" SeBions of the
Conclufion, as alfo the Author sfhort marginal
Notes on his new Tranfiation of the Revelation
from the original T'ext revifed^ prefixed to his
Expofition^ ofwhich they are a Summary, exhibit-
ijig a general View of the Scheme andOeconomy
of the Apocalypfe 3 all which bring the Book
to the bulk in which it now appears, Aftd
here I beg leave to take notice, fnce printijig
by Subfcription has often been abufed to mean
andfelfifhpurpofes, that this voluntary Addition
is an incontefiable proof that no lucrative mo-
C

xviii. P R E F A C E.

tive /ay concealed under the pretence ^publick
benefit which I gave as my priJicipal reafonfor
puhlijlnng this T'reatife. Much lefs was I moved
by any defire of Reputation : for in England
no kind of writing does a man lefs credit than
tranfating^ and in a work of this nature a faith-
fid reprefcntation of the fenfe of the Author
(which I hope I have given) in plain language
is all that is necejfary ; oryiaments of ft He, the chief
ground of a tranftators claim to honour, being
moft wanted where the Senfe is of leaft Value,

Pit COMB, in Somerfetfl/ire,
April 1 8, 1757.

ERRATA.

Page X. line i. for intrude, read obtrude . — p. xxiii. I. 14.
for has gone, r. has yet gone. — p. li. 1. 14. for cafe, r.
caufi. — p. 85. 1. 19. for C. xviii. r. C. xvii. — p. 179. 1. 2.
for left between them, r. left o-ver andabo"je them. — p. 227.
1. 8. for again, with, r. again. With. — p. 283. 1. 2. for
■ Revelation, r. relation. — p. 294. 1. 21. for Dr. Emiliane's,
r. D'Erniliune's.—^. 305. 1. 16. for this, r. hii, — p. 324.
for Though, r. Through.

BENGELIUS's

PREFACE

TO HIS

Exposition of the Revelation,

The Contents.

I. nr'h.

§ I. ^ / 'HE Importance of the Re-
velation*

II. "The Occafion of this Illuftration

of it.

III. The Parts of which it confefls.

IV. Tloe Difference between this ajtd

fome other wofks of the Author.

V. The main D^iign of this, -

A

("• )

§ VI. Six Sorts ^/Syftems of the A-
focalypfe.

VII. An Admonition concerning the

Expojitiom that prevail at
this Day.

VIII. Hoe Ground of this prefent Ex-

pojition. •

IX. It's FuUnefs, and it's Relation to

our Times, efpecially with
regard ta the Roman Papacy •

X. Ihe Author s Orthodoxy; parti-

cularly as to the thoufand
Years.

XI. Concerning the Determination of

the prophetical Times.

XII. Of praSiical Ufes.

XIII. A necejfary hAmomtiony and an

Anticipation of o\y]tdiiomthat
might be made hereafter.

XIV. 0/ /y6^ Stile.

( iii. )

S XV. 72^ Conclufion, That the time

IS AT HAND.

O LORD JESUS,

* Deal boimttfully with thy fei'-vantSj
that we may live and keep thy
"word.

Open thou our eyes^ that we may be-
hold wondrous things out of thy
Revelation.

* PSAL. CXix. 17, 18.

( iv- )

DEAR READER,

p'^rS'^UR Lord and Saviour Tesus
^ )^ Christ, both before his Paf-
fion and after his Refurrec-
tion foretold many things to his Dif-
ciples, and they again, in quaHty of
his Apojiles^ to the faithful after our
Lord's Afcenfiion; as may be feen in
feveral places of the Holy Scriptures
of the new Teftament, But among
thefe we have only one Book that
is wholly and expreffly prophetical:,
which, for that very reafon, becaufe
it Is the only one of the kind, is fo
much the more confiderable. This
is the Revelation of St. John^ or ra-
ther the Revelation of Jesus
Christ, which he fent to his Servant
John, Rev. i. i. This Prophecy

( V. )

(however little it may be regarded)
requires the particular attention of
the men of the prefent and rifmg
generation. If any one then under-
takes to contribute, to the right un-
derftanding or the falutary ufe of it,
fomething that has not perhaps been
obferved before, he ought, whoever
he be, to have one fair hearing, if not
preferably to others, yet equally with
them ; 'till it appears whether, with
God's help, he can make good his
Preteniions. I will explain myfelf
on this head with Simplicity, Up-
jightnefs, and Perfpicuity.

II.

After I had fpent a confiderable
time on the Criticifm and Expofition
of the Greek New Tejlamenty and, in
the year 1724, was come as far as to
the Revelatio7t\ I took in hand thi^

{ vi. )

part of Scripture very unwillingly, and
my only motive for undertaking of it
at all vi^as, that the work might not
come out deficient in a principal part,
having no Defign or Expedation of
making any extraordinary difcovery.
When I was come near the intended
Conclufion, there opened unexpect-
edly to my viev^ a Refolution of the
prophetical numbers contained in the
xiii'^ and xxi'' chapters, and of the
great things there fpoken of. Now
as I had not in tlie leaf!; before then
been in fearch of this, fo I had no
reafon to fhut my eyes againft the
arifing light; I went on therefore in
this track, and frequently found that
one thing after another laid itfelf
open to me. The Importance of the
fubjeft and regularity of the work,
' and my earneft defire to draw up a

( vii. )

fatisfaftory Plan of the agreement be-
tween the Prophecies and the Events
(to the confideration of which I was
awaken'd by the notorious tragical
doings at JThorn, which fell out even
in our own time, by which the quan-
tity of blood formerly fpilt on the
ground has been fomewhat increafed
anew) induced me to communicate
fome part of my thoughts to thofe
who might in one way or other be
affiftant to me, or whom I might ex-
cite to a further purfuit after the
truth.

Now the thing having fpread far-
ther than I had thought or apprehend-
ed; many perfons, learned and illite-
rate, artful and iincere, Clergymen
and Laymen, pious and vicious, peo-

X The Maffacre at Thorn happened in the year 1724, of
which a fhort account may be feen in Salmon's modern Hiftoay
in the prcfent ftate of Poland, Chap, y.

( viii. )

pie of leifure and of buHnefs, acquaint-
ances and ftrangersj experienced and
unexperienced, thofe who had before
embraced other opinions, and thofe
who began but now to enquire, of
both fexes^ of all ranks and ages,
imparted to me their thoughts (which
were very various, partly favouring my
Scheme, and partly oppofing it) moftly
by word of mouth, often by writing,
and fometimes too in print. This
proved very ferviceable to me by
putting me upon confidering many
things more maturely, guarding them
more carefully, and expreffing them
more clearly. So, tho' the moft con-
iiderable objedions ftruck not at me
in particular, but in general at the
fiudy of the Revelation, nay at the
Revelation itfelf\ I continued to ad-
here purely to the Word of God^ and

(ix. )

went on without being difcouraged
in meditating on it (I hope not fruit-
leffly) as I do ftiil. Some friends
though they did not mean that I
Ihould delifl from this ftudy, yet de:-
fired to reftrain me, and in a manner
conjur'd me that I would pubUfh no
part of it; but others urged me to
publifh it refolutely and without de-
lay. Thefe laft, as they found op-
portunities, have imperceptibly pufh'd
me on and even drawn out of me
one thing after another before the
Plan was come to due maturity. It
was, I may prefume, the will of God
that it fhould not be buried in the
earth; and I adore his providence,
who, by the courfe the thing has
now taken, has eafed me of the bur-
thenoffoUicitQUsdeliberation,whether

I ihould fpeak out, or keep filence*
B

(X. )

In the mean time, as I intrude no-
thing upon any man, fo neither do
I decHne the labour of difcovertng
what I know of thefe things, to thofe
who hope for any benefit from them ;
nay at hi^That became almoft indif-
penfible, in order to obviate thofe no-
tions which people afcribed to me con-
trary to my fentiments. They have on
this occafion had various conjedlures;
but I affiire them that I know nothino;
of any cabbala, of any divination, of
any aftral influence, or any ghoft or
apparition. The fource of fuch and
fo very different opinions concern-
ing a new difcovery of a7tcknt Truth
is this, — that many do not underftand,
or do not confider, how rich a trea-
fare the Holy Scriptures are. I am
nothing •, and if somewhat of the Truth
has fallen to my lot, I found it in the

( xL )

common way or high road to heaven,
by fearching the PFof^d of God with
fimphcity, and w^ithout any option
of mine. This I diHgently laid up,
and now exprefs it confcientioufly in
proportion to the degree of Certainty
I have of it, (which in the circum-
ftantials is often fmall enough, but
in the fubftantial part is, thro' God's
grace, ftrong and clear) and modejlly
offer it to examination. By fuch re-
ftridions as thefe, by the affiftance
of the Truth of God, I fhall limit
myfelf in all that I advance, and
therefore hope I Ihall not be reproach-
ed, either before or after my death,
for any thing that I fhall fay.
III.
In this manner there is here pro-
pofed to all who are willing to receive
it. (i.)The wholeTEXT o^xhtRevela-

( xii. )

tlon in the German tongue, tranllated
from the Greek, revifed in the way I
did the whole New Teftament-ffome
time fince, according to the moft
approved Manufcripts. [Many

people do not like new tranflations
of all the New Teftament or all the
Holy Scriptures; but allow a new
tranflation of fingle books for an Ex-
pofition of them, as for inftance
Ghebard's twelve 7ninor Prophets:
and this Tranflation oith.^ Revelation
may ferve in the mean time for a fpe-
cimen of a German Tranflation of
the whole New Teftament which I
have written a confiderable time ago,
but don't think to publifli unlefs
there appears a reafonable expedlation
of more benefit from it than con-

t Publiih*d 1 734 at Tubing in quarto, with critical notes;
arid at Stutgard in oftavo, without them.

( xiii. )

tcntion about it: in which cafe it
jtiight come abroad accompanied
with the neceffary Explanation of
thofe turn$ of expreflion that will
fometimes occur different from the
German Idiom, l>ut efpecially with
ufeful Illuftrations of the moft diffi-
cult places, and edifying Annota-
tions.} Why we Ihould read
after this ot that manner in the ori-
ginal Text, I have ihewedj:elfe where;
and what great ftrefs ought to be laid
upon a carefully revifed Text, eipe-
cially in the Revelation^ may appear
from its being in many places the
principal foundation of the explana-
tion. A fhort § Abftraa of the Ex-
pofition is given on the margin of the
text. (2.) The Exposition

% In the quarto Edition mentioned in the laft note.
§ See this after the Introdudlion,

( XiV. )

at large, which confifts of three parts,
Firft, in the IntroduSiio7t there is an
'A7iaJyfts of the Prophecy in general,
and that both of the Things and the
'Times contained in it. After that
follows a continued Expojition from
beginning to end of the text; every
verfe of which is repeated before the
rcmarks upon it. In the Concluji-
en will be added fome points that
concern the Expolition in general.
IV.
In my Latin Annotations on the
New Teftament, entitled the:}: Gno-
mon, which will be publifhed in due
tim.e, there will be Notes on the
Apocalypfe too : but this prefent Ex-

X The Author In his Preface to the Gnomon (which was
printed in quarto at Tubing 1742) gives a prudent reafon for
his ufing fo uncommon a name, which it will be much to the
|!)enefit of the rea^ders of that Book never to forget.

( ^^- )

pofition is almoft every where different
from them. As fome things f were
more proper to be expreffed in Latin

for the ufe of the learned in the lan-
guages, and yet the fubftance of the
matter might as well be deUver'd in
the vulgar language for the ufe of thofe
that are not fo ; I have accordingly
difpofed of my Remarks in the one
or the other of thefe Treatifes : each
of which is indeed an entire one in
its kind, yet it will be moft profit-
able to read them both together. I have
alfo heretofore publifhed in Literary
yournals fome things relating to thiii
Subje£t ; particularly, in the i oth
part oi Alien und neicen aus de^n Reich
Gottes^ what I call'd a J Plan or
Draught : in the 23d part of Geijl-

t Such as Criticifms on the Signification of the Origina!
Words, the Phrafeology, ^vC.
t Grund-Rifs.

( xvi. )

Ikhen FamUj A |i Caution for good
men : and in fome of the former
|).arts, one or two § Declarations^ &q.
for which tjie Editors of thofe Col-
ledlions had given me occajG.on. But
jToow in this German and the other
Latin Treatife, all thefe are brought
together, explained and compleated.
After pubHcation of thefe two trea-
tifes, I muft, and wilHngly do, fub-
mitmyfelf to the Judgment of all that
are fkilled in difcerning of Truth.
V.
The principal Defign of this Ex-
pofition is this, — that That <?;^/k which
is contained or implied in the Words
of the Prophecy may be pointed out
and clearly deduced to Edification ;
biit not that every fort of Dodrineand
Kefleciion wMch liich and fuch words

Ij Yerwahrung guter Seelen. % Anzeige.

( xvil. )

might fuggeft fliould, on occafioii
of them, be produced, tho' good in
itfelf. An over-eurious Inquifitive-
nefs is not proper here, as it might
feem to be to men of a warm imagi-
nation, but only a becomingly accu^
rate fearch, which will approve itfelf
to the attentive reader by the con-
ftant harmonious agreement of all the
points and all the manners of ex-
preffion.

VI.
In what manner the Interpretati-
ons of xSx^AfQcalypfe have varied from
the earlieji times of the Chriftian
Church to our days; and hoWj amidft
the frequent enlargings of the limits
of the Time in confequence of thefe
variations and of the manifeft mif-
^reckonings, the Truth, like the Heart-
blade or Spire in a plant^ has remained
C

( xviii. )

unhurt; and how even the Fibres and
Shoots of the right fenfe, that were
torn off and fecreted, are found all
together in an Interpretation now at
length growing up to maturity ; this,
I fay, is deduced and laid before yoa
in the ""' Condujion. I prefume alfo
that I am not fo unacquainted with
the principal modern writings on the
Revelation that it will be any great
difadvantage to our Subjeft. All

the Syftems we have of the Apoca-
lypfe may be divided into thefe jix
Clajfes:, of each of which I will fub-
join one Example.

I, Some go in a metaphyjical and
theofophical way ; for inftance Tmo-
theus Philadelphus.

* Part 4th which is an hiftorical account of the feveral Ex-
pofitions of the Apocalypfe, from the earlicft ages to the
prefent times.

( XIX. )

2. Most proceed in a htjlorical
manner; and of thefe again fome reft
in Generals^ as Mr. Chancellor Pfaff
pf Tubingen*

3. Some come X.oP articular s^ and
refer moft things either to theHiftories
of the Jews and Romans of tlie firft
ages, as Herman von der Hardt ;

4. Or have a view to the times
of the Reformation^ as Jac. Koch ;

5. Or they ftill wait for things to
tome^ fo that according to therii even
xh!tfeven Churches are only typically
fulfilled, and of the reft not fo much
as the Jirji Seal in any manner ; as
Dr. Joachim Lange-^

6. Or they interpret the Prophecy
concerning all thofe things, one after
another, which have come to pafsy?//r^
Si. Johns time to this Day and what

( XX. )

fliall farther come to pafs from hence

to the e?id of the worlds as § Luther.

Among fo many Expofitions as we

have, it will be hard to find one that

has in it but a fingle article of any

confequence by which it is as different

from thefe fix clafies, as they are from

one another. In all of them, fome

lay afide all Reckoning of the Times

or Chronology^ and thus negledl a

neceffary Datum for the Analyfis;

others build their Analyfis on the

prophetical Day, which they very

erroneoufly take for a whole Year\ an

Error that has of a long time been a

great hindrance to many Proteftants,

nptwithftanding their otherwife good

caufe, yet is ftill very common in

§ This mull be the Perfon meant by an ambiguous Expref-
fion in the Original. At leaft, both Luther anfl Bengdius him-^
felf, are of this 6th Clafs.

( xxi. )

England and Holland ; on the con-
trary, many in Germany begin now
to take the Times too fhort, and for
the moft part according to the com-
mon acceptation of the words, trowd
almoft all, frqm the 4th even to the
19th chapter, into the narrow fpace
o{ three years a7ida /^^^ of calamitous
times; and make the ipace before
and after them fo large, that they
would be at a lofs to refute any per-
fon that would be fo extravagant as to
put off thofe better days which they
acknowledge and hope for, 'till feve-
jal generations hence.

VII.
In other points I dp not Ipend
much time in refuting falfe opinions;
only I look upon it as neceffary to
examine the moft commonly read,
moft celebrated and ncweft Interpre-

( xxii. )

ta,tions5 and efpecially that which lays
fo much ftrefs oti the lately mention'd
three years and a half^ — as the prin-
cipal Texts they are built upon come
in our way: which is done with all
modefty and fobriety % in the Intrg-^
DucTiON § XL, Lv, Lvi, lu the Com-
mentary or Expojition on Chap. v. i.
vi. 2, II. viii. I, 7. xii. 12. xiii. 1,
(under the loth Thefts) 15. xvi. i,
xvii. 8, ^c. See alfo the 11 1 and
I v*^ Sedions of the Canchifion^

VIII.

Both Extreams, one of which is
grounded on the Day o{ ?iyear longy
the other on a day of 24 hours^ with
all the difficulties they lie open to, I
avoid by the Calculation command-

+ The Citations in the Original are not of the Texts, as here,
butofthePagesof the book, [wit..] p. 104. 150. 318. 345*
369, 408, 425. 619. 68-7. 734. ^12. 857. &c.

{ xxiii. )

cd in the Text and not hitherto
pradifed by others. This will, in the
"f Or do Temporumy appear to be the
chief Foundation of the whole Chro-
nology of the Scriptures, and lead us
on through all in the right (viz. well
nigh in the middle) way^ chiefly by
the Refohition of the Apocalyptical
Times^ Of confequence the true in-
terpretation of the things themfelves
goes on likewife in the middle wav,
between the other interpretations, in
a direft and fure road in which no
body has gone wrong, and where we
fee ourfelves at no great diftance from
others on both fides of us. The prin-
cipal Mean indeed in rightly interpret-
ing the Holy Scriptures, and elpecial-

t Or do Temporum{a. fmallbook 0^ Chronology f of 440 pages
Oftavo in Latin) was publilh'd at Stutgard, 1 741 . This and
the Author's Nei': Tejiam^ and Gnsmm may be had at London.

( xxiv. )

ly the prophetical parts, is the gift of
the divintGrace. Yet, under that, the
Knowledge of Languages, Hiftory, and
the hke is of fervice. Many have a
little of one of thefe and nothing of
the other ; and truly one may obferve
a kind of antipathy between thefe two
forts of perfons ; but that is not the
fault of the thing, but of human Im-
perfedtion. 1 am contented to be
efteemed inferior to every one of ei-
ther fort; yet hope withall that in
both together I fliall not be found
utterly fruitlefs. For in the way we
are in, we may confider iitvijible
things, both good and bad, and alfo
the- vtjible (or natural, civil and
church hiftory) and regularly difpofe
of, both what is paft and what is to
come, not only in general but circum-
ftantially, in its courfe through the

( XX¥, )

fcveral centuries one after the otlier.
For which reafon it is to be hoped
that thofe who make themfelves well
acquainted with the prefent Expofi-
tion, will be able to pick out of all
others the beft parts, and alfo reduce
to its proper place in the Prophecy
every thing that occurs in Hiftory and
aftually has come to pafs fince St»
John's Days, as fome part of the
ihittgs that Jhould be thereafter^ chap.
i. 19.

IX.
Some perhaps will think I ought to
iiave explained at large and circum-
ilantially only what belongs to the
frefent time and not have faid much
about the reft\ that fo the former
might the more readily have catch'd
the -eye of the reader. But in the
manner I have proceeded, T^at fart

D

( xxvi. )

will be eafiily found out by any body
that will turn to the xiii'\ xvir' and
xviii''' chapters. But then thefe chap-
ters are clofely conneEiedwixh the reji:
the Analysis therefore muft take in the
whole. Befides, what has no beauty
to one may be very ufeful to another.
At an Entertainment, one is not to
accommodate himfelf wholly to the
palate of any fingle gueft, however
worthy; and therefore he provides
Variety, and leaves every one to chufe
what he likes. However it is indeed
in a particular manner neceflary for
thefe our times that men regulate their
conduct by the contents of the im-
portant Chapters juft mentioned. At
leaft the hitherto openly maintained
Apocalyptical Teftimony of the Re--
formers againft xhdPapacy and Romey
ftands firm and unfhaken: and by

( xxvii. )

rlrtue thereof, on mature conlidera-
tion of the Thefes in the Expojition
of c. xiii. I, of the laft remarks on
c. xvii. 3, and thofe on ven ii, &c,
this matter may be moft evidently de-
cided, with the approbation of all
men of folid fenfe in the following
manner ; viz, — They are wrong in
this matter i, Who eagerly interpret
every text, if it but founds frightful-
ly, of the Pope and Rome. 2,''^ Who
make no diftindlion between xhtBeaJi
and theWhore of Babylon. 3 ,^^y Who
interpret the Beafi to be Ibme invifible
power that is an enemy to men. 4,'^'^^
Who thereby underftand either the
Heathenipy or the antient Chrijlian^
Romany or the Roman-German Em-
pire. 5,''^' Who begin the times of the
Beaji fo far back that they include in
them the moft excellent Bifhops of

( xxviii. )

Rome in antient times. 6/^^'' Who fo
fix their eye on the Papacy in its pre-
fent ftate, as if what is prophefied of
that fingular Antkhrifi^ fo called,
were not yet wholly to come hereaf-
ter. 7/''' Who do not difcern that
the right expofition of the Prophecy
miakes a decifive Difference between
this Papacy and the Proteftant
Churches, in which though in other
lefpedts, alas! too much divided, ne-
verthelefs they enjoy many privileges.
On the other fide the three following
Pofitions are agreeable to truth, i.
The Beafi rifing out of the fea is the
Hildebrandine Papacy \ and Babylo?t
i« the City or State of Kom^^ and con-
fequently, in and along with that,
the Church of Rome now fo degen--
erated from her antient purity. The
difference between them is great, fee-^

( xxix. )

mg many Catholicks are zealous for
tie Church of Rome and it's plaufible
pre-eminence, who yet bear no good
will to the Papacy, ii, The Beafi
riling out of the bottomlefs pit is that
lingular Antkhrifi fo called, an In-
dividual, under whom the Papal pow-
er, which owes it's growth to fo ma-
ny innovations, will be more mif-
chievous than ever, in, Not only a-
gainft them who worfhip the Beaji
out of the bottomlefs pit^ but alfo ia-
gainft them who before that time
worfhip the Beafi out of the Sea^ is
That Threatnifig pronounced, which
is the greateft in all the Scriptures,
and w^hich Ihall refound powerfully
from the mouth of the third angel,
Revel, xiv. 9, 10, ii»

( XXX. )

:^nD tl)e tl)iri) ange! foUotbeD
t\^tm, fapins tuitl) a louD t)oice,
^f anp man toorfliip tl)e beafi
anD })ts image, anU receilje Dis
mailt in !)is; foreJ)taD, or in i^isi
!)anij, X^e fame Cball Drinfe of
t!)e tBtne of ti)t toratl) of (Boh,
lD!)ic!) is poureD out t»itl)out
mixture into tl)e tup of l)is im
tjignatton; anb \tt ftall fte tor-
mented toif]^ fire anD brfmttone
int{)e prefence of t|)e!)olj>ansel0>
anU in t))t prefence of tl)e
5lamb : ZnU t\)t fmoKe of t!)eir
torment afcenOeti) up for eijer
anD ei}er : anD tl)ep |)at)e no reft
Dap nor nigl)t, t»t)o toorftip tl)e
ijeafl anD f^is image, anD toljo-
fot^er receiijetl) tl)e marfe of i^is
name.

( xxxi. )

I MAKE it my ftudy to keep dole
to the plumb-line, as it were, of the
Truth, not only in the articles of
Faith, but alfo in all the other points
that are prophetical, even in my Ex-
preffions : and particularly I have,
in the Expofition of the xx'' chapter,
declared the foundnefs of my fenti-
ments with regard to the true and
the falfe notions of the Millennium.
The bare mention of a Millemnu77t
now no longer raifes horror or aver-
fion among men of underftanding.
In the fourth Sedion of the Conclufion
will be adduced ten Pojitions long
fince eftablifhed ^ the laft of which,
concerning the prefent fubjeft, has
an indiffoluble connexion with the
former nine. 'Tis true human au-
thority has little weight in the Cafe ;
but whoever relifhes old better than

( xxxii. )

n€W things, let him here conlidcr
ferioufly that the firft nine of thefe
PojG.tions are to be found all together
in the excellent Luther \ and the
tenth was unanimoufly acknowledg'd
in the moft antient times, and even
at this day does not meet with any
confiderable oppofition, though there
are here and there fome few who
will be the laft to affent to the truth
in this point. My whole Expofition
is conformable to and guided by thefe
Fofitions fo that no Expofitor is Icfs
liable than I am to be fufpefted of
Novelty^ if any ftrefs is laid upon that.

XL

In a difquifition of this nature one
cannot leave out the Chronology or
Determination of the times without
being deficient in a principal point ;
t>iat he can never be too caudous in

( xxxiii. )

his manner of propoiing it. If I had
not already let fo much of that mat-
ter come abroad, and yet could have
forefeen how few make a right ufe of
it ; I would have dealt more fparing-
ly in it. Now I cannot draw back :
but I have all along fo often pro-
tefted my Caution and Modefty, that
I am afraid it will be irkfome to can
did Readers; and on the other fide, J
hope that whatever happens no man
fhall be able to reproach me juftly
with having mifs'd my aim. Three
different Parts then concur here to
make a complete Expofition ; i. The
literal or hifiorkal Interpretation it-
felf ; 2. The Refolution of the pro--
phetical "TimeSy where is fhewn what
is the proper length of each of them;
3.. The ConneBling of determinate
K

( xxxiv. )

parts of the hiftory of paft times and
of future occurrences with particular
Years, Months, &c. This third part
will be deemed the moft liable to
miftakes, . efpecially in what we look
upon as foon to come. But if thofe
times, for example, w^hofe end we
have deliberately and of purpofe not
exprefTed '//// the Conchijion of this Ex-
pofition, and ^^then but conjeSiurallyj
fhould end later, or even fooner •
iieverthelefs the wholo, Jirji Point ftands
firm, namely the hijlorical Expofaion
of the xiii'' and xvii'' chapters ; and
t]i^fecond point will alfo remain un-
hurt, viz. The Refolution itfelfx£ the
prophetical "Times^ and confequently
the whole of the I NTR O D U C-
T I O N ; in which I have taken great
care to treat of the times wholly in the
AbJiraSi^ and do not in the leaji refer

( XXXV. . )

any of them to any certain Year, nor
fo much as in one inftance to any
part of Hiftory. Now, he who,
becaufe fome one co?tjeBure may
fail, fhould haftily and eagerly
drive on, and rejeft not only that
part of the Conclujion^ but alfo every
thing elfe both in the Expojition and
IntroduSiion^ would do violence and
wrong to the truth, to his own lofs.
Some may fay, Would it not havebeen
better to have let alone all Conjec-
tures, and ftuck only to Certainties ?
To which I anfwer. He that can \vl
this cafe take precifely the one with-
out ajiy part of the other, fhall have
my full Approbation. ' But could the
Fathers under the old Teftament ex-
ercife their Faith and longing Expec-
tation of the MeJJiah in fuch a man-
E 2

( XXXVl. )

ncr that they muft t i^t alone all
Coniedures about the Time when f
Let one only promife a child fome-
thingj prefently comes the eager quef-

'X We know from \?et.\. \\^ that they did not.
; The Reader AVill, I hope, indulge me in a ihort DigrefTion
to point out an Inference which feems naturally deducible from
the Words of the Text now fallen in our way, i Pet, i. lo,
11,12; as I am not aware that it has been obferved, and it
relates to a Queflion of great Importance, To the Prophets
fwho prophejied of the Grcfte of GoD towards the Chriftians, it
was REVEALED that thefe Blefiings did Tiot belong to their own
Times but to a then future Time. But nvhat Time nvasfg-
mfed by the Spirit of Chrift in them teftifying before -hand
the Sufferings 0/ Chrift a- J the Glories after them^ was not
REVEALED to them ; elfe they needed hot to \i2cvtfcarched for
jt. Now "Mhere could they fearch but in the njcry Wc^-ds of
the Prophecies delivered by themf elves from the Spirit 'f Chrift
in 'them tefiifingt ^cJ But if thefe IVords were of their oiutz
chujhig to expref^ the Ideas or Notions they were infpired with ;
it was in vain to fearch for any Notions, implied in or deduci-
ble from them, other than what they tiiemfelves intended to
convey by them and which confequently v/ere revealed, be-
cante well knonvn to them. They knew then that the Words
they /poke or it'>-c/f had a more extenfive Meaning than they
themfelvesj^^:/ apprehended, and implied things ^f/ unkn-nxj» to
th^m and likely to be found out by fearching. Therefore
the Words were fiot theirs ^ but thofe of the Spirit of Chrift in
t^tm teftifying, ^c. that is to fay. The very Words, in which
the infpired Writers fpoke qr nvrote their Revelations, were
divinely inspired.

( xxxvii. )

tion, When? and if this queftion is
iiot anfvvered, many conjedlures arife,
and no body thinks it needful to
reftrain him. Let us only propofe
and receive the Truth as the Truth,
and Conjectures as Conjedures. If
any of thefe don't fuit, in That Par-
ticular \^tx\\^Co7ttraryof it be received
as a Truth : which however would
not have fallen (o readily under our
obfervationj if it had not been for
that fame Conjedure. And this I
think is a fair apology for Conjectur-
ing. But if any one of them
{hould prove to be right, let That be
reckoned as a Truth; and thereby
the Truth will be greatly confirmed
in other points too. I intreat my
Reader to remember this faff age here-
after^ wherever there is occafw7t ; that
if any body piakes objedions that arc

( xxxviii. )

iiereby anticipated, there may be no
need every now and the7^ to refer him
hither again.

XII.
. If any one is in great expedation
of pradical ufes, he will not be entire-
ly difappointed ; tho' I am not very
copious on that head. A Phyiician
cures his patient not by talking, but
by doing. We may pj^opozmd the
Word ot God to one another profita-
bly in ptiblick difcottrfes or writings ;
but apply it particularly only in clofer
converjatioit : nay, one that is watch-
ful over his foul can beft apply it to
his own ufe in private, by the aid of
the Spirit of Grace. Every one ought
to propound for the common benefit
what is given him ; and that too, juft
as it is given him, Rom. xii. 6, 7, 8.
I defire not to impart to others any

( xxxix, )

thing of 7ny own\ but to point out td
them only what is contain'd in the.
Scripture itfelf, and That is alv/ays
accompanied with a falutary power.
An Expofitor, as an Expojitor^ ('tis
another matter when one is proving
or exhorting) is Hke a man digging
a well, who needs not himfelf throw
any water into the fpring, but only
contrive that it may run thro' a chan-
nel and pipes into the veffels, without
wafte, ftoppage or foulnefs : and thus
he and others come at plenty of wa-
ter. Many make a wrong ufe of
a multitude of pradical Obfervations :
they grow weary of them, and then
let them all pafs unheeded : When a
reproof or a comfort is particularly
fuitable to any one, his confcience
will be awakened or his heart fortified
by it, when propofed to him in a ge-

( xl. )

neral manner. Faith, Hope and Clia-^
rity, when there is any food for them
on the way, quickly find it out. It
would be in vain to prefs a full Soul
to eat and drink ; that would only
tend to deftroy his appetite altogether:
but a hungry and thirfty man is glad
when fgmething is fet before him,
and takes to it prefently. Likewife
tho' what in reading we apply to our-
felves may not ftrike fo fenfibly and
forcibly as a pailionate difcourfe that
is immediately direded to us ; yet
both are efficacious, each in it's own
way. I don't mean by this to dero-
gate from any man : I only inform
you of my manner of writing. Yet
fometimes I come in unexpededly
with something roujing : let him that
is foUicitous about pradical Ufes of a
right fort, carry this along with him

( xli. )

till he comes to fuch another pafTagCo
If in the interim he meets with many-
things that appear to be leaves with--
out fruit, let him but wait till he has
got a comprehenfive view of the
whole and he will find the fruit

XIII.

I WISH every man might take all
things juft as they are offered to him,
and in the moft important places
would alfo weigh the words with ex-
actnefs. Thus the whole would be
profitable to every one, and do no
man any harm. Sometimes I make
a Remark that riiay appear obvious
and indilputable, and therefore fu-
perfluous ; yet it may be put there
to obviate an error, or prevent a mif-
take. Thofe that have x^^A fever al
Expofitions will often perceive the
F

( xlii. )

reafon for fuch or fuch an Admonl-^
tion or Caution; others may fafely
kt it alone. Sometimes I propofe in
cautious expreflions Thoughts not
yet full ripe; which however by be-
ing difcovered, may give a fair oc-
cafion the fooner and more adequate-
ly to bring to light the falutary Truth
that is near at hand, but ftill hid.
See for example C. ii. 25. xv. 3, 4.
I cannot afk every one to read the
whole : every one is welcome to judge
of what he reads in a right manner,
and underftands. To him that ca-
fually glances his eye on fome one
Thelis or other where there are fome
unexpeded Particulars, which yet are
confequences from the entire difcuili-
on of the Point, it muft needs appear
a little ftrange. But if he is a pru-
dent man he will forbear, not only to

( xliii. )

contradidjbut alfo to give his afTent.
He, that contrary to St. Ja7nes\ Ad-
vice,(C. i. 19) but after the way of fo
many learned men, cannot conde-
fcend to hear^ to read (where there is
much to be read) to learn \ and is only
fwift to f peak ^ to write^ to judge y or
perhaps too, to Wrath ^ to Heat ; has
here Materials enough to work upon :
but let him be alTured there lies alio
a Humbling block in his way. I do
not afk my reader to be prefently of
my mind in things where I myfelf
went through many doubts before I
could attain to Certainty : but let him
alfo not be poUtive that where he is
as yet doubtful no man elfe can be
certain. A great many objedlions,
as I have mentioned above, have
come to my hands, enough with the
anfwers to them to make a pretty

( xliv. )

large Volume : fo that this work is
by no means finifhed in a hurry ; but
is fo contrived as to include all fuch
objedions with their anfwers, in reali-
ty, tho' without exprefs mention of
them. Some few will be expreffly
anfwered in the following /;^/r<;^//f^/^;^
§ LIU. Every point will be proved in
it's proper place, altho' it may be al^
ledged or cited elfewhere without
proof. On fuch occafions one muft
be well acquainted in the firft place
with the Text^ and then with the^r^-
fer place of the hitroduEimt and Ex-
fofittoft on each point : otherwife he
may in due time be obliged to own
that his objeilion proceeded from
miftake and precipitancy. What is
contained in this Expolition or can
be fairly inferred from it, that I abide
by. On the other fide let no man

{ xlv. )

fufFer liimfelf to be drawn in to be-
lieve that I have any where faid, or
given ground for faying, any thing
that has no relation to or connexion
with this Expolition : but rather, if
any one will charge me by word or
writing with any thing abfurd, fcan-
dalous, ufelefs, high-ftrained &c,
contain himfelf fo long only as 'till
he fhall have informed himfelf of my
real fentiments; which I declare fo
much the more freely, as I have
found by experience that no caution
is fufficient to prevent idle imputa-
tions. I muft obferve one thing for
the benefit of the publick. There is
many a man that can find in his
heart thro' ignorance, thro' vain glo-
ry, out of wantonnefs, without the
fear of God, without refped to the
publick, to blacken his neighbour,

( xlvi, )

aiperfe iiim, curtail his expreflionsj
pervert his meaning, in a word, lye
and calumniate, in his Remarks, Ob-
fervations. Reviews, &c. and all this
only becaufe he lives near a Prefs: He
that is attacked in this manner, often
knows nothing of it, or for certain
reafons does not anfwer, or his an-
fwer does not come out fo foon, or is
not difperfed fo far. In the mean time
others letthemfelves bebiafs'dby thofe
v/ritings, extoll them, bawl and write
after them, inflame yet others, un-
happily oppofe the truth under a fa-
natical conceit of Zeal for it, and de-
molifli more than perliaps themfelves
build in mxany years : and yet would
be coniidered as Heroes and Pillars.
O vainly learned World ! take Warn-^
ing my Reader ! I am content if thou
believeft no good that any one fays of

( xlvii. )

me, only beware alfo of admitting
evil Infmuations. Hear what I my-
felffay; and infpire others with the
fame Caution. From them who fpeak
in the fpirit of Truth, I accept of e-
very corredlion or improvement with
refpecft : yet nobody, I hope, will
charge me with wilfulnefs, if I do
not immediately, in complaifance to
other people, retrad: this or that fen-
timent which has oftner than once
undergone an Examination and Re-
finement in the long time it has lain
by me. When I was attackt on oc-
cafion of my Revijion ofth^ original
facred "Text itfelf, I was oblig'd to
make a fhort Defence more than
once: but as to Expojitions (which
people may form a right Judgment
of when once they have a corredl
Text) I jQiall fpend my time much

( xlviii. )

more fparingly in Apologies and Vii>-
dications ; efpecially if my opponent
conceals his name, and befides pro-
duces no Objedion but what is here
anticipated or anfwered before-hand.
On a neceffary Occasion I may give
a fhort Anfwer, and perhaps publilh
it in the "Tubing literary News.

XIV.

As toPerfpicuity; Unce my man-
ner of Writing has appear' d to fometo
be deficient in that refped, I have
not only taken great care about it
myfelf, (as I have already explained
myfelf in the Preface to the Har-
mony oftheEva?tgeliJls § ii. 35.§viii)
but alfo every now and then laid the
parts of the work, as I fmifh'd them,
before fkilfuU Friends^ and profited
by their advice.

( xlix. )

Obscurity may arife from a vari-
ety of Caufes, i/' from the Nature of
theSubje&'s being fuch that the Illuf-
tration of it depends more on labori-
ous fearches and arguments of tedious
deduction than on propofing of well
known and already cultivated parts
of learning, ii/'"^ From a Writer s
Inability to exprefs himfelf clearly -y
tho' for my part I am not ignorant
of the requifites for Perfpicuity, and
m reality I do^ I hope, moft times,
and even this Moment, write clearly :
and confequently can write clearly,
iii/^^ Vvomxhtmoreorlefs clearKnow^
ledge and Certainty in an Expoiitor j
who ought to ufe Exprejftons propor-
tioned thereto : by which means he
will likewifc give occafion to the
ftarting of new Queftions in the minds
G

of his Readers, the Solution of which,
however, both he and they muft wait
for 'till God pleafes. iv,'''^ From the
honeji Carefuhefs of an Expofitor,
who when any DifHculty falls in his
way does not decline the labour of
unravelling it; whereas he might have
filently paft it over, without any per-
fon's taking notice of it. v,'''' From
a Loathnefs to detain himfelf with a
a Multitude of Words andExpreflions,
when a Multitude of Thoughts flow in
upon him. vi,'^'^ From putting too
muchtruji in the diligence and ability
of every reader, vii,'^'^ From the
Indolence of the reader^ who perhaps
would fain take the thing at a Glance,
and can fcarcely allow himfelf fo
much time, to apprehend the mean-
ing, or even to publifh a Recenfton
or critical Review of a book, as he

( li- )

muft fpend in reading or writing a
paragraph in a News-paper : whereas
a difcourfe whofe parts have all a clofe
connexion with one another, let the
method of it be ever fo plain and the
expreflion ever fo clear, will yet re-
main a very Riddle to every one that
does not read the whole^ or does not
read it right ^ or does not read it oftner
than 07Ke. As to the above mention'd
Plan or Draughty which appear'd
fo difficult to fome (tho' not to all)
there was,(viii,"''')a farther particular
cafe of obfcurity. It was a fketch of
an cxtenjGive and in fome degree new
defign, whofe parts were varioufly in-
terwoven w^ith one another ; and be-
jGides, on mature conlideration I chofe
not to give it in p7^int fo clearly as I
had before imparted it to others in
G 2

( lii- )

writing in the Eajier-Thoughts fo
Called. It was then high-time to
publifli fomething for a teftirilbny in
cafe of what might happen afterwards;
but it was not proper to difcover allj
lior is it yet ^ as to fo??te Points; but
in the reji I have now made it, I pre-
fume, plain enough, nay fometime^
plainer then many will like. He that
is not fatisfied with all this, is at li-
berty to read this Expojition or to let
it alone. If he reads, he is iritreated
to have patience with me, as I wa^
obliged to have patience while I wa^
labouring for his fervice. If any
man has the gift of greater Perfpicliity,
and can exprefs in an eafier mannei:
thele very things which I lay before
him ; I {hall, far from being difguft-
fed, look upon it with pleafure. But^
to fpeak the truth, we are grown too

( li"- )

nice, and delicate. Where there fe
Poverty of Spirit and an Appetite for
Truth, where This is regarded not
only as food, but alfo as a Medicine ;
there people- will not require every-
thing to tafte fo fweet and prefently
to melt upon the tongue, but will alfo
fometimes receive and fwallow that
which is even four, or bitter, and not
ferved up in a lordly difh, and has
liothing befides to recommend it but
its wholefomnefs. How far thole
who are fond of the mathematical
method will find their account here,
I cannot fay. I have made it my
Bufinefs to bring cogent Proofs : tho'
itisnotneceffary to put the fignatures
of the feveral pofitions, throughout
the whole courfe of the work, like the
letters of the A. B. C. on the Keys of

( "v. )

a Spinet. But enough of thefe ar-
cumfiantial matters.

XV.

An enlarged Heart, purified from
fubtile Self-will, and v/hich acknow-
ledges God in all his gracious Gifts,
and praifes him for th^m, is not every
man's Portion : yet it is particularly
and highly requifite, 'till the uncom-
mon but yet true, variegated and yet
fimple Illuft ration of this incompara-
ble Book, and which tho' not plaufi-
ble, is yet fuitable to the divine Wif-
dom, fhall make it's way thro' fo
many Obftacles as it will meet with.
Thofe that have been longeft exercifed
about fuch things will be moft at a
lofs when they meet with any thing
uncommon. There may be two Per-
fons fo different in their opinions, that
it is impoffible they can both be in the

( 1^- )

right ; yet both are convinced of their'
being fo. Now each of them prefcnt-
ly runs away with fomething (as it
falls in his way) that he imagines he
had made out before, gives fcarce any
farther heed to the truth that v/ould
awaken him, and falls afleep again
over his formerly belov'd opinion.
For the reft, fuch People will think it
fufficient to fay, this or that remark
(namely, where I do not differ from
them) is a good one enough; but as
to the main point they are greatly at
a lofs. — IVew TVtne requires new Bot-
tles. I do not mean by this to ob-
trude myfelf upon any one. God
hath taught me, from my youth up-
ward, to have a view to him only ;
and in the mean time I have under-
gone fo many and (o various Judg-
ments of Men, that as to matters of

( Ivi. )

Confclence 'tis all one to me whether
God andMa7i^ or God alQ7Wy approve
of my doings. A thing is neither
good nor bad in reality for meeting
with the ready affent of many or few.
A greater degree of knowledge av/aits
Pofterity. To them much, that is
now made little account of, will ferve
for a foundation on which to build
more ; much, that is now current,
will no longer pafs ; and many proofs
that, to moft mxcn, feem not fufficient
now, will then be more than enough.
In the mean time, if thofe who love
the Appear aiice of Jefus Ghrijl find
here veftiges of the Truth, they will
join with me to praife the name of
God, and help to procure the fupply
of all my defedts out of the fuUnefs of
Grace and Truth which is in Jefus
Chriji^ for their own benefit and mine.

( Ivii. )

The fame will be done by thofe who
examine what is here laid before them
with fervent Prayer, afliduous Medi-
tation, and attentive Refleftion ; who
bring it to a greater maturity by means
of a greater light or more exacl know-
ledge, and turn it to their own Ad-
vantage with regard to Fait h^ Patience
and Conjlancy.

Here is now before you the Re-
velation ILLUSTRATED, Men may
pay what regard to it they pleafe ;
but that Warning is ftill in Force,
and at prefent in an emphatical fenfe,

The Time is at Hand,

Cati'vent of Denkendorfy
Sunday, Sept. 4, 1 74Q.

H

(59)

GENERAL ANALYSIS

Of the Revelation,

BEING

Bengelius's Introdudlion to his full Expo-
fition of That Prophecy.

THE CO NTENTS.

Part I. Confiderations on the Reve-
lation by itfelf.

§. I. ^HE Book op a IS or cxplatm iff elf.
II. A Table ^r Summary of it,

III. We miifi not lay a?iy arbitrary Foimda^

tion to build an Expofition upon,

IV. l^he Confideration of both vifible and in-

vifible things mujl enter into a right
Expoftion,

( 6o )

§. V. VL Of the Centre a?2d Circum-

ference in the main Vi^

Jion: T^hat many I'hings

are propofed in a twofold

Manner,

VII. VIII. Of the Septenary or niim-

her feven, efpecially as
applied to the ChiircheSy
Seals, "Trumpets ajidVials.

IX. X. XI. The Beginning of the En-
quiry, with the Trumpets,
particularly with the three
Woes under the three lajl
Trumpets,— -and chief y the
third Wo.

XIL The Meaning of the feven

Epifles, Seals, Trumpets
andVials, asfiewn in § ii.

XIII. That thefe are not feven Pe-

riods of Time:

XIV. XV. — but fourCircles or Spheres:

XVI. -"—each of which has its in^

t7'vduBory Preparation.

XVII. XVIII. The Order of the Text and

the Completion of if, is
fingle, or but one :

( 6i )

§. XIX. — /ind /jeref beSimultzncum

is occafionally €xplai7ied.

XX. XXI. XXII. "The Divifion of the Sevens
into Fours and Threes :
and to isjhat the Foin'i
and the threes relate.

XXIII. A Gradation cr gradual

Advance is difcernibk^
throughout the whole :

XXIV. ^^particidarly at each fe-

venth ;

XXV. ^-Which therefore has ifs

peculiar Preparation,

XXVI. TheUk^nds, and yet Dif-

ference, of federal Paf-
fages of the "Text :

XXVII. '^-from whence the fuitablc

meaning of homonymous
* Words is to he deduced,

XXVIII. Of the Afpea or View which

this Prophecy has to IfraeL

Part II. Of the Application of the
Prophecy to Hijlory^ in general.

XXIX. This Application to hiforical

Events is necefaiy,

* Words having feveral flgnifications; as, AngeJ^ Heaven,
Star, Sea, Head, Horn, Sec.

( 62 )

§. XXX.

— and has fe'^jeral Ufes in

feveral Ages.

XXXI.

The Toints that ought to be

C07ijidered by us at this

prefent Time.

XXXII.

Four Conclujions deduced

from them.

Part III. Chronology; or, theReck-
cning of the Times.

XXXIII. XXXIV. This aljo is neceffary.

XXXy. Great variety of Times

mentioned i?t the T^exts^
luhich is a'Thifig of great
Importance^ andon which
much depends,

XXXVI. 7he Numbers that accom-

pany them muji be taken
precifely.

XXXVIL The Beginning of the Re-

folution of thcniy viz,,
at the three Woes a-
gain (fee § ix J

XXXVIII. XXXIX. /// thein ^the prophetical
DAYisnoiacommo?2Tear:

( h )

§. XL. — nori'sk a commonDzy. ^bhrb^
ly iiccejjary Caution concerningDr.
Pete?^fe?is Syjiem,

XLI. The Source of th Errors of the

greatejl part ^Expoiitors.

XLII. T^he "truth lies in the Middle, or
between the Extremes,

XLIII. By taking to our AJftJiance the Num-
ber of the Beaft, we come to
know nearly what the 42 pro-
phetical Months are:

XLIV. — and moreover ^ what a Chronos,
a Kairos, Gff. are^ nearly.

XLV. By the Help of the 1000 Tears they
are more exadly deter7ni7id'^ and
/'^r^ ^Proportion rtm?ii?2g thf^oiigh
the whole ^ and alfo the Number
feven are obfervable,

XLVL Hereby we come fome^vhat nearer yet
to the true length of the prophe-
tical I'imes,

XLVIL The 42 Mofiths and the Number of
the Beaji are of the fame Le?igth,
The Number Seven is obfervable
in the Moiiths alfo.

( 64 )

§. XLVIIL Jhe prophetical Month is proportion-
able to a folar Months \being the
1 2 th Part of a prophetical Tear] :
and the 1260 Days of tlje Woman
are prophetical Days,

XLIX. T^he precife Lejigth of the threeWoes
determined: as alfo that of the
1260 Days of the Woman,

L. A Septenary obfervable in the for-

mer^ and a round Number \and
alfo a Septenary] in the latter,

LI. T!he Coincidence of Hifory with this

Refohition of the T^imes is to be
feen in the Expofitlon of the Text,

LII. The near Determination [in §. xliii.

xliv.) of the Length of a fingle
prophetical Day, Month, Hour
and Year maintained -, and the
true precife Length of them is
alfo fully fiewn : The Septenary
and the Rotundity arifmg out of
ity a7id the fo oft occur7'i?2g Num-
ber 666 f are taken Notice of,

LIII. An Objection aiifwered,

LIV. The remaining Periods of Time are
to he refohed in the Expoftion,

( 65 )

§k LVi T'he above-mentioned four Spheres (in

§. xiv. XV.) are hereby further con^

firmed :
LVI. — and an Interpretation 'which is at^

prefent gaining ground^ farther op-

pofed.
LVIL I'ranfition to the Expofition.

PART FIRST.
L

^kjJ^^HE Prophet Dajiielw^z commanded
jm{ '^ k ^^fi^^^ ^^P i^^ "^^ords fpoken to him,
k./«^"*5jtt{ and to feal the Book 'till the lajl Times,
Ch. xii. 4. 9. On the contrary St. fohn, 2l
long time after, v^-^^ forbidden to feal the words
of the Prophecy revealed to him. Rev* xxii.
10. Accordingly the Revelation, not-
withflanding the wide Extent of its prophe-
tical Contents, is yet fo contrived that the
other Prophets ar^ not neceffary for the un-
derftanding of itj but it is rather neceffary
for the underftanding of them. This very re-
gularly difpofed Syftem brings it's Key along

with it; having, tho' uncommonly difficult

I

66 Introduction.

in it's Subjeft, a fingularly eafy Method,
being provided with Variety of Partitions,
Paufes, Forms of Expreffion, and fucb
helps to an Analyfis of it.
IL

The whole Contents of the Book at firft
fight appear to be naturally divided into
three Parts: of which we will at prefent
draw up a Table and bring the rQquifite
Proofs of it hereafter in their proper places.

They are
/ I. The PRELIMINARIES:

\, The Title of the Book C. i. 1-3.

2. The Addrefs or Direction of it 4—6.

3. The main Point and Summary of
the whole — — • 7, 8.

^4. The glorious Appearance of Jefus
Chrtjiy at which He

1 . gives John his Commiflion, and
orders him to write 9—20,

2. excites the Angels of the Seven

ChllrcheS"Q{Y.^^\yzi^x% and Smyrna

and Pergamus ^ of Thyatira and

Sardis and Philadelphia andLa-

odicea, — to prepare themfelves

worthilyfor his coming; and pro-

mifeth to him that overcometh

great things • — C. ii^ iii.

i

Part i. §. n. ,67

II. The DISCOVERT of things to ccme.
Here are reprefented in one only and
continued Viiion^

J. in general and at once, ALL POW-
E R ^ in Heaven and on Earth given
by Him that fitteth on the Throne
to the Lamb^ by the opening of the
Seals of the Sealed Book C. iv. v.
The four firft Seals take in alhoijihle
thiiigs to eaft and weft, fouth and

north C. vi. 1—8^

And the laft three ^ the inviJJble: g&c.
^hcfeventhy being the moft impor-
tant^

I., has its proper Preparation —

— — C. vii.

2. exhibits the Silence in Heaven,

the feven Angels with their

Trumpets, and the much lur

cenfe — C. viii. 1—6.

[2. The particular EXECUTION ' of

it 5 in which under thefefe'ven Augeh

a This is a Reprefentation of the fohmn INAUGURA-
TION of Jesus Christ into his Mediatorial KivgJum.

^ This is the ftoperly prophetical F^krt of the book; con-
taining//^^/'ro/»/^f-//V«/HisTORy of CZtZ/^'s Ai>mimstrai ion
of this Kingdom, from the Time of his RefurreBion or Afcen-
fan till he delivers it up to the Father ; or, the royc.l M A-
NIFESTOof Jesus, declacing how he will deal wiih
hi* Subje^s as they are rebellious or obedient.

i

68 Introduction.

and their Trumpets one after a-
nother, the Kingdom of this world
is gradually broken, till it reverts to
and becomes the Kingdom of God
and his Christ ; where are to be
confider'd

!i . the four firft Angels and their
Trumpets — 7—12.

.2. the three \iL{\: Angels with their
Trumpets, together with the
three Woes by the Locufts, the
Horfemen, and the Beafl.

13. ix. I &c.
The Trumpet of the Seventh
is of all the moft important,
and with regard to it there is
to be obferved

/^i. the antecedently fworn
Limitation of time, and
the circumftantial ac-
count of the certainly-
future converlion of the
great City, under the
Trumpet of this Angel
about the end of the
third Wo. C. x. xi.
^2. the Trumpet itfelf^ and

Part i. §. ii. 69

(i, 'Si Summary of the contents
of it — C. xi. 15.

2. the previous Thankfgiving
of the Elders on account of
the Completion 16—18.

3. the Completion itfelf 19.
And here
.1. the Birth of the manly

Son and theCafting down
of the Arch-fiend from.
Heaven xii. i— 12.

the Oppofition on Earth,
namely that hideous third
Wo : and

^ I . it was brought on by
mea^is of

1 . the Dragon xii. I2i>(

2. the two Beafts xiii.
2. Men in the meantime

were

I. warned by three
Angels xiv. 6 &Ci

z. cut off by the Har-
vell and the Vin-
tage 14 &c.
chaillftd and ftir-
red up to Repent
tancc by the feven

^3

70

Introduction.

Plagues or ViAts

^— — XV. xvi.

1^3. the great Whore along

with theBeaft increafe

the Calamity xvii.

3. the Royal Vidory, by

which thefore-mentioned
Enemies are removed ;
and that in an inverted
Order, viz.

/i. the great Whore is
judged and the King-
dom of God gets the
upper Hand xviii. xix.
2. the Beaft and the falfe
Prophet are thrown
into the Lake of Fire
— — xix.

\3. Satan is bound and
Tmprifoned — xx-

4. the Government of Chrijl
without oppofition: For
after the advances made
at feveral times (partly
before the Trumpet of the
Seventh Angel C. vii. 9.
but moftly under it C.
xiv* I. 13. xy. 2.) his

Part i. §. ii. yx

Reign goes on now in it s
full Sway: For
/i. The Nations are no
longer feduced by Sa-
tan but have Chrijl for
their Shepherd xx. 3.

2. Thofe of the firft Re-
furredtion reign with
Chriji — 4*

3. Gog and Magog are
deftroyed, and Sata?i
who had been let loofe
for a little while, is
caft into the Lake of
Fire — 7*

4. The dead are judged
— — II.

15. A new Heaven; a new
Earth; anewjerufa-
lem, the everlafting.
Kingdom xxi. xxii.

4ll, The CONCLUSION: which has a
Relation to the Preliminaries above,
and exaftly anfwers to them. xxii. 6-2 1 ^

The Reader would do well to make him-
felf throughly acquainted with this Table ;

72 Introduction*

for in the Expofition we fhall not give argu-^-
ments or contents at the beginning of the;
feveral Vifions or of the Chapters -, but han-
dle the Text plainly and diredly in the Or-
der of the chapters and verfes; The Con-
tents of the whole will be beft comprehend-
ed by means df the Seftions in the T'aik ;
as they are properly diftributed in it accord-
ing to their real P art s^ it being framed with
a farther view then merely to be a help to>
the Memory. It may alfo be ufeful to com-
pare with this^ ajiother TCablc which is to fol-
low in the firft SecSion of the Condiifion.

III.

There has been for a long time much
Talk and much Writing about Hypvthefes, as
they call them, widi regard to the Expofition
of the Prophets; as many Interpreters want
fuch Grounds to build their Interpretations
upon. But thefe are commonly the Produdl
of an arbitrary choice, dnd people fo twift
and bend the Word of God to fait with them,
that they deduce from it any thing that they
would fain find in it. Nothing that is right
can be fettled oh fuch a bottom: and I ear-

Part i. §. iii* 73

ncftly entreat that no one will afcribe to me
any particular Hypothecs, We may (nay,
we muft) begin with fuch Remarks as the
text clearly points out; afterward we inay
advance farther and farther by means of right
deductions and inferences. In making re-
marks we ought to rely on the words of the
text, without furmifmg, that perhaps the
Fervency of Spirit in which St. John wrote,
may have fometimes difcompofed him, and
that thereby his difcourfe may be disjointed
and out of order. The utterance of weak
and frail me?i may be fomewhat difturbed by
jtheir earneftnefs : but it is not fo with the
holy meit of God» We ought then to receive
what lies before us with the ?rverence due to
what iswRiTTEN. In a difcourfe wherein
your own profit or lofs, your own honour or
diflionour is concerned, felf-kve will move
ycu to weigh exadly every w^ord : in like
manner the Love of God will not fufter us
to be contented with a fuperficial view of the
words, in a prophecy in which the honour
of God is fo nearly concerned,
K

74 Introduction.

IV.

Some interpret almolT: all the Prophecjr
e^vifibk things, from civil and ecclefiaflical
hiftory : and others moftly of the invifibk.
This laft may be called a theofophical and
philadelfhian or pneumatical, and the other
a hiflorical and emblematical expofition.
Writers of either ki?id are apt to overdo in
fheir own way and fo come fliort in the other ^
#^^will not prefcribe to our Lord Jesus
Christ, what he ftiould oi* fhould not have
made known to us in his revelation; but
Feeeive juft what he jQiews us with thankful-
nefs, fimplicity and reverence. All Power
not only o?i Earthy but alfo in Heaven^ is gi-
ven to the Lord Jesus, as he himfelf tef-
tifieth after his refurredtion : At his Name
cvejy knee bows-, of things in heaven^ of things
on earthy and of things under the earth. His
Name is above every name that is named in
this world and in that which is to some: He
hath the keys of death and hell. This Power of
his, and how by little and little he brings all
into SubjeBion to himfelf, is the Principal
THING defcribed in this precious book*

Part i, §. iv. 75

^Jobi is informed fometimes by the Lord
Jesus himfelf, fometimes by Tan Angela now
by cnc of the four ccleflial linji?ig Creatures^
then by one of the twenty four Eiders: and
hence it is plain that thefe laft were not pil-
grims or fojourners upon the earth, but in-
habitants of thf )ther world, in which the
liturgy and divine fervice is celebrated, Mi-
chael fought his battle &c. C. iv. v, viii. ix.
xii. xiv. XV. &c. Now as all that comes to
pafs in the vifible world fprings from the in-
vifible: thither aifo it flows back after it is
done. Thus wonderfully are they inter-
woven : and we muft adhere purely to what
we find writte?;, Invifible things are more
noble and important : but we, flrangei-s on
the earth, more eafily underftand vifible
things, and by thefe arife up to the others.
All hiftory civil and ecclefiaftical ferves for
a proof that Jesus Christ hath allPcrwer on
'Earth : but his Fewer in Heaven is incom-
parably more extenfive. Now whoever fixes
his eye on the one or the other only^ will
look upon our conclufions as jejune and fcan-
ty; but he who, v/here St. John treats of in-
vifible and heavenly things, attends to invlil-.

y6 Introduction.

ble things too; and again, when St. John
points to vifible things of this lower world,
in iimplicity follows him, will in this middle
ivay rightly underftand the whole.

The Throne, and He that fits upon it,
and the Lamb, is, as it were, the Center 5
near to which ftand the four living Crea-
tures, the twenty-four Elders as priefts, and
the Angels ; the Circimiference is all the in-
vifible and vifible Creatures, Pfalm Ixxvi.
3 I . All that be rcitnd about kim. Hence this
book has often a diJlinSl and yet intimately
connefted reference to God, and to Christ ;
and after them to the Angels, and to the
Saints : and in confcquence of this, m.any
things are propofed in a twofold manner :
C. X. 7. xi. 3. and C. xiv. i — 5. and C. xiv.
JO. and C. xviii. 20: 21 — 23: 24. and C.
xxi. I, 2 — 9, 10. Many things are ex-
plained and cleared up by the help of thi^
Obfervatioji : and therewith agrees what fol-
lows in §. xix. and xxvi.

Part i, §. vi, vii, vm. 77

VI.

* Sometimes the motion is from the Cen-
ter to the Circumference, viz. when the
word of commatici concerning ihmgs to be
done is iifued out and pubhfhed, C. v. 9 :
Sometimes again from the Circumference to
the Center, namely when the thing is cc-
tically executed :md. fulfilled, C. xix. 23 both
of them chiefly exprelTed in fongs of praife
and thankfgiving. He that attends to this
wdll duly conne(^t thofe things that have a
coherence, and rightly feparate thofe that
are difcin6l,

VII.

The facred number of Seven occurs of-
ten 3 and even thofe Seveiis or Septcnaries that
are the moft briefly and tranfiently mention-
ed, are in themfelves very profound, myfle-
rious and w^eighty : as the fevcn Spirits of
God, the feven Eyes and feven Horns of
the Lamb, and fo the feven Thunders, yea
the feveh Heads of the Drao-on too.

o

VIII.

But the feven Churches in Jfia widi their
Angelsj the feven Seals, the fevcn Angels

yS Introduction.

with their T^rumpets^ and the feven Angels
with their Viahy are defcribed at full length.
Concerning the feven Heads of the Beaft
we will fay nothing yet : and only obfervc
that both in good and evil things the invifi-
ble and vifible worlds agree in the Septenary
Number; T^hat being reprefented and fet
forth to us by this, as T&V is (as it were) a-
nimated and ruled by that.

IX.

In our difqulfition concerning the above-
mentioned exiaifive Septenaries, the fureil
and eafieft way w^ill be to begin with the
feven T^rumpets^ and of them the three lajly
under which are the three Woes. Here
we find manifeftly three periods of time
diiliinguifhed from one another by determi-
nate intervals and breaks, and accompanied
with a great many plain characflers and to-
kens; fuch as are not to be found either
with the trumpets of the four firft angelsi
or the churches and their angels, or with
the feals or vials. In all difquiiitions cer-
tain particular data are neceffary, to ena-
ble us, by fettling them firft, to determine

Part i. §. x. 79

afterwards concerning generals^ which are
not fo prccifely characterized. Whoever
thinks he can dij-petife with fueh data in his
refearches, may take ^hat^ if he v/ill confi-
der of it, as a token that he has not taken
the thing by the right handle. A lock on
the door of a well-fecured room or cabinet
has, to be fiire, its own proper key, with-
out which there is no opening of it, but by
violence,

X.

THE^r/? wo has its indiijDiitable limits^
in C. ix. I — II. Thcfeccndis defcribed irk
C. ix. 13 — 21 ; and the tkh'^d in the whole
xiii^^ C. Let us diftindly examine the prin-
cipal parts of thefe texts neceflary for our
purpofe*

I. The whole paffage from C. x. i. to
C xi. 13. has a manifeft relation to the
trumpet of the feventh angel. The fum
€f the paffage is this : ^hat it potdd not
be a full Chronos' more^ til!, in ths

*= X^oyc? (CJjronos) fignifies Time in general : fo that \vc
fay properly a long Chronos, ViJ/:ort Chronos, or Time. But
«^ben the word is ufcd without ar.y rdlriclive epithet or

8 O Ln T R O D U C T I O N .

days of the voice of the fevcntb angel ^ivheH
he Jhould begin to found ^ the myftery of Go jy
JJ:cidd be finifoed^ as he hath declared to his fcr-
vants the prophets. But this paflage conlifts
of two parts which run parallel to one ano-
ther. The firft is C. x. 5 — 7 ; and the fe-
cond, C. X. 8 — xi. 13. The contents of
both parts begi?! indeed before the end of
the fecond wo, with the Non-Chronos and
the many Kings : but in the connedted Se-
quel do not end under the trumpet of the
fixth angel, but rather reach into the trum-
pet of the feventh angel, nay under that
quite on to beyond the end of the third wo;
and that in fuch a manner that the whole
IS infeparably connected. Thus the paffage
confifrs not of fuch things as were all paji
before the trumpet of the feventh angel ;

name of any meafure, it figniiies in the beft Greek writers, a
long time; as, oict x^ov^, after a time, is .the fame as ^ja
iraTO^s ^povs, after a long time. Here however Chronos is
fufpofed, and farther on in this Introduftion it will be pi o^ved^
to fignify in this prophecy a certain determinate meafure or
fpace of time (and that a long one, more than a thoufand
years) as Kairos, &rc. rendered a Time and Times and half
a Time C. xii. 14. is vniverfally acknowledged to figivify.
This Space of not a full Chrovds is for brevity called a Non'^
chronos.

Part i. §. x. 8i

but of a declaration of fuch things as^^A
kw^ partly before, but moftly under that
trumpet. Confider the following clear
proofs of it, (i.) The Pofture of the an-
gel, fetting his right foot on the Sea, and
his left on the Land, and lifting up his
hand to Heaven, concurs to declare that,
under the trumpet of the feventh angel,
the Enemies, notwithftanding all that they
fhould attempt, as yet in Heaveriy and af-
terwards on the Sea and on the Land^ muft
however be driven out of Heaven, the Sea
and the Land, and give way to the finifb-
ing of the myftery of God. (2.) The
Beaft does not arife out of the bottomlefs pit
twice, but only once toward the latter end
of his time ; and the proper place in the
prophecy of this ariling is in the defcription
of the beaft, namely, in C. xviii. where it is
fpoken of in v. 8. as yet to come ; whereas
in C. xi. 7, this arifing is only mentioned
beforehand by the by^ but however for a ve-
ry neceflary purpofe, viz. the declaration of
the Time of the two Witnefles. (3.) It is
in one and the fame great City that two

L

82 Introduction.

Earthquakes happen : now the firft of them
falls out under the Vial of the feventh an-
gel, and the other afterwards under the two
witneiTes. The firft is general ; but the
great city was not fo greatly hurt by it, be-
ing only divided into three parts. The fe-
cond is not general, but falls on the great
city in particular, but then fo much the
more heavily ; for feven thoufand people
were killed and the reft put into a falutarjr
fright. Certainly the Divifion of the city
into three parts did not fall out after their
being thus converted ; for (4.) In general
the dreadful accomplifliment of the holy
wrath of God comes firft, and after that
follows the long'd-for finiftiing of the myf-
tery of God. (5.) There are not two fuch
finifhings of the myftery and words of
God, but one only: the proper place of
which is in C. xvii. 17. at the deftrudion
of the enemies : but in C. x. 7. this joyful
end is beforehand promifed. Thus all that
is mentioned C. x. xi. concerning the Myf-
tery of God, as alfo concerning the holy
City and the two Witneflis, plainly reaches,
cs to the Execution of it, far into the trum-

Part i. §. x. 83

pet of the feventh angel, under which it
will, at its proper feafon, be fpeedily finifh-
ed. For this reafbh there is alfo a remark-
able difference in the expfefilon : before
and after this palTage the prophecy is ex-
preffed moftly in the preterfenfe, but iii
C. X. xi. moftly ih the future : where the
certainty of the thing, the time how long it
fliall be to the accompli fhment, its whole
courfe, the place where it will be, and the
inftruments to be employed in it, being all
defcribed before-hand, the way is cleared
that the defcription of the Raifer of the
third wo and of his overthrow, under the
trumpet of the feventh angel, may go on
without interruption,

II. The phrafe, ^e fecond wo is pajl^
behold the third wo cometh quickly C xi.
14. very well agrees with this, that
much of what Is mentioned before it
in C. X. xi. ihould be fulfilled, noturi-
der the trumpet of the fixth> but that
of the feventh angel.
There are three important phrafes In C,
viii, 13. ix, 12. xi. 14, The firft, Wo, Wo,

84 Introduction.

Wo^ to the inhabitants of the earth : the fe-
cond, ^hejirjl wo is pajl^ behold there come
two woes more hereafter : the third, Tl6^
fecond wo is paft^ behold the third wo cometh
quickly* And to this third phrafe refers that
iterated declaration, Wo to the earth and the
fea C. xii. 12. But no fuch fourth phrafe
is to be found afterwards, that the third wo
is pajt &c. Hence it follows that all thefc
phrafes are principally denunciations or de-
clarations of future miferies (juft as future
good things are foretold by fimilar phrafes,
C. xiv. 7. xix. 7. I^he hour of his judgment is
come: the marriage of the Lamb is come) and
that in the fecond and third phrafe the prin-
cipal thing intended is the Coming of the fe-
cond and third wo, and not the firft and fe-
cond wo's being paft. Wherefore alfo it is
not faid, the two woes are pajl\ but, the fe-
cond wo is paji : whereby the iirft wo is as
it were forgotten. On the contrary, the
phrafes always have an equal regard to all
the woes that are comings viz. Wo^ Wo^ Wo:
^wo woes are coming ^ not, the fecond wo is
coming. Likewife in the denunciation of
the yet future fecond and third woes \\% faid.

.Part I. §. x. '8:5

hereafter y and, qiiickly-y and in both, behold.
If therefore it fliould be objedled that, in the
prophecy, the End of the fecond wo is not
mentioned 'till after the death and refurredlion
of the two witnefles and their being taken up
into heaven, and that therefore all thefe
things happen under the trumpet of the fixth,
not the feventh angel: the proper anfwer
would be, that in the above-mentioned fe-
cond, and fo alfo in the third phrafe, the paft
wo is juft taken notice of merely as paft, the
t\\mg principally in view is that which is to
come.

Hence it plainly appears, i, That the
third wo muft follow in the text very foon
after the words, T'he fecond ivo is pafl^ behold
the third wo cometh quickly. Accordingly
there follow immediately after thefe words
in an infeparable connexion (i.) the Sound-
ing of the feventh angel, juft as the found-
ing of the fifth and fixth angel follows after
the firft and fecond phrafe; (2.) the Summa-
ry of the contents of this fingular and fo im-
portant trumpet, which contains in it fuch a
variety of matters; (3.) the Execution of
th.efe fame contents, and particularly the Oc-

86 iNTkODUCTION.

cafion the Dragon takes to raife the third wo>
together with the third wo itfelf ; jitft as in
the trumpet of the fifth and fixth angel the
Source of the firfl: and fecond wo and thefe
two woes themfelves are mentioned. Now
as the phrafe concerning the quick coming of
the third wo could not be rightly feparated
from the three juft mentioned points, to which
it chief y relates, and be fet farther back ; fb
neither again could it have a place before that
paflage C. x. i — xi. 13. For under the
trumpet of the feventh angel there fall out
good, then bad, and again good things:
now it was very fuitable that tlie contents
of the trumpet in general fhould be propofed
in that place, viz, fooner than the immediate
propofal of the third wo^ w^hich makes but
a party and indeed a fmall part, of the
things contained under that trumpet. An-
fwerably to which, from C. x. i. to C. xi.13.
there is nothing faid about the third wo, and
civen in C. xi. 14. it is not faid the third wo
is come ; but, is coming. So then, neither
was it the proper place before the beginning
of the x'^ chapter to make this declaration.
Beheld the third wo cometh quickly. Yea evea

Part i. §. x. 87

the words, the fecojid wo is pajl^ would have
come in too early at the end of the ix'^ chap-
ter, where neverthelefs the defcription of the
fecond wo is fully completed: for the fo oft
mentioned paflage (C. x. i— xi. 13) adually
begins, as to both it's parts, before the end of
the fecond wo. Thus it is quite proper that
in the third phrafe the lefs emphatical part,
the fecond wo is pafl^ [fince it was not to be
feparated from the principal part, Behold^ the
third wo cometh quickly y tlie proper place of
which is in C xi. 14, viz. juft before the
founding of the feventh trumpet] fhould
(palling over what comes in as it were in a
parentheiis about the two witneffes &c.)have
a retrofped: to the conclufion of the ix''*
chapter.

III. The Trumpet of the feventh angel

begins C. xi. 1 5. and to this Trumpet

belongs the reft of that xi'^ chapter,

the xii'^ the xiii'*" and fo on.

The Summary of the contents of this

trumpet is in C. xi. 15. and in ver. 17, 18.

And the Execution of it is opened in ver. 19.

and from the beginning of the xii'^ chapter.

88 Introduction.

is treated of at large. If any one ihould fancy
that the Prophecy begins again quite anew
at the birth of the Man-child C. xii. 5 ; this
opinion will be throughly confuted by the
remarkable, clear and important Parallelifm
of the Voices in G. xi. 15. and the Voice in
C. xii. 10. T^hofeVoiccs fay thus; T^he^king-
do?n of the world is become cur Lord's and his
Christ's: Afterward this Voice fpeaks;
Now the fahatioriy the might and the king-
dom is become our God's, and the poisoer his
Christ's. The former voices belong in-
difputably to the trumpet of the feventh an-
gel; wherefore this latter voice muft necef-
farily belong to it alfo. For the fubjed of
both is entirely the fame, with this only dif-
ference that in the latter voice the Execution
is more particularly and precifely mark'd out
by the word Now (a^'^O ^^^ ^^ ^^ following
words more fully celebrated : from whence
we may fee fo much the more clearly, that
thofe voices were before this voice, and there-
fore this belongs to the trumpet of the fe-
venth angel, as certainly as thofe do. Yea
the adual Breaking forth of the execution of
tliis trumpet falls out in the midft between

Part i. §. x, 89

^ofe and this^ where Satan is caft out of
heaven. All that follows, after this caft-

ing out, is clofely connefted.

From thefe III remarks we may draw
thefe following conclufions.

I. No part of what is written from C. x. i
to C. xi. 13 belongetb to the fecond wo.

This follows from the i'' remark^ and
is farther confirmed from the following an-
tithefis, viz. in the fecond wo things ended
in a wretched impenitence, C. ix. 20, 21:
on the contrary, Cxi. 1 3, (at the finifhing the
myftery of God) in the converfion of a very
great multitude. Only the latter end of the
fecond wo, and the beginning of what is
mentioned from C- x. i to xi. 13 in point
of time run parallel a ^ little while,

II. T!he third Wo is defcribedat length in C.
xiii, and only notice gin^en of it before-hand in
C xii. 12.

This is proved in the \t^ remark. But
let us more throughly confider in C. ix, xii,
xiii, the following refemblances referring to
M

^ Not above 40 years ; whereas the whole Non-<;hronos,
C X. 6, is more than 1000 years.

90 Introduction.

one another in many particulars, and advanc-

ing by feveral fteps ;

r^ Wo.

i.T'heOccaficn'y
A Star fallen
from heaven,
and the Pit of
the Abyfs o
pen'd.

2. The Leader;
The Angel of
the Abyfs.

'T^.neArmy-y
Locufts.

4. The Perfons

plagued *y
All the Men
that were not
fcaled. I

ir Wo.

i,TheOccafiOn'y
He who cry'd
out of the
horns of the
golden altar,
Loofe the four
angels on the
Euphrates.
2. The Leaders-,
The four An-
gels that had
been bound on
theEuphrates.
'l,TheA?'my',
Some hundred
millions of
Horfemen.

4. The Perforis

plagued 'y
The third part
of Men.

iirwo.

\,TheOccafio7i\
Michael, after
whofe vidlory
the Dragon is
call out of
heaven.

2. The Leader 'y
The Dragon,
who had hi-
therto beenjn
Heaven.
'^,TheArmy\
Two horrible
Beafts, and
their Adhe-
rents.
4. The Perfons

plagued 'y
All that dwell
on the Earth,

Part i. §. x

5. J'he DuraA 5. "The Dura-
tion-, tion\
Five Months. One Hour,
one Day, one

6. T^he Power-,
To torment,
without kil-
ling.

one

Month,

Year.

6. 'The Power;

To kill.

91.

5. The Dura-

tion ',
A fliort time,

forty-two
Months, &c.

6. The Power;
All Manner
of Mifchief.

Here are three Columns that fland by the
Jide of one another ; and in each, fix points
or articles that follow one another. In the
firft column is the Jirjl, and in the fecond is
the fecond wo. Now let any man confider
if it is poffible there fliould be 770 wo, or even
not a more horrible wo, in the third co-
lumn, which refembles the firft and fecond
in all points ; or whether he ought not rather
to difcern and acknowledge in it the third wo,
and that as the greateft of the three. Add
to this fome other reflexions on the third
woe's having fometimes a refemblancc, either
to both the firft .and fecond alike, or (for
reafons that will appear in the Expofition)
only to one of them, and totr.etlnics fome-

92 Introduction.

what particular to itfelf, as it is the moft
grievous of them all. Let us produce thefe
reflexions in the order of the fore-mention-
ed articles.

I. 2. The Occajioriy ^nd the Leader.

The Occafion [of each woe] is always
taken by the enemies from what is every now
and then a doing by fome mighty Being who
from one wo to another has a ftill higher
fundtion. And the enemies come always
from a higher and higher place, and are in
their nature more and more mifchievous.

2. 3. The Leader y and the Army.

The Leader in the firfl: wo hath an He-
brew and a Greek name, Abaddon and Apol-
Jyon: and in like manner in the third, a Greek
and an Hebrew name, the Devil (^c^ta^oxo?)
and ^ Satan. There is not the leaft mention
made of this Dragon from C. iv, where the
vifion begins, to C. xi ; but fo much the
more frequently is he mentioned from C. xii
to C. xxs fo that on his coming down hither
from heaven it is faid, Wo to the Earth and
the Sea. This, this, is that third Wo, which,
« i. e. the Calumniator, the Traducer. f i. e. the Enemy.

Part i. §. x. 93

as the moft horrible, is fo oittn foretold \m-

der the exprefs name of a Woy viz, firft of

all, together witli the firft and fecond wo,

C. viii. 13 ; then after the firft and along

with the fecond, C. ix. 123 again after the

fecond, C. xi. 14 ; and laftly alone, C. xii.

12; and then, almoft prefently after this

laft declaration, circumftantially defcribed in

the xiii^'' chapter. Or iliall the difafters

brought on by the Angel of the Abyfi and

the four Angels from Euphrates be reckoned

as two woes, but on the other fide the

Dragon himfelf and under him the t^wo

Beafls (in the defcription of whom the Man

of Sln^ 2 Thefl^. C. ii. 3, is alfo included)

bring no Wo by all the incomparably great

miferies they are the authors of?

4. The Perfotis plagued.

Whereas in the firft phrafe, JVo, V/o^

Wo^ mention is made of thofe that dwell on

the Earth 'y 'tis thereby fignified (compare

C. iii. 10 with C. vi. 10.) that on the whole

the three woes fall not indeed upon the

Saints, but otherwife are general. Now in

the firft and fecond wo, as the firft touches

the Jeu's particularly, and the other the

94 Introduction.

Heathejiy but more efpecially thtfalfe Chrif-
tians^ and fo both of thefe are not fo gene-
ral ; mention is made only of men, with-
out any great emphafis 3 on the contrary, as
the third wo touches all thefe forts of people,
and fo is flrid:ly general, now for the firfl
time is exprefs mention made again of thofe
that dwell on the earthy and indeed often,
viz, in a paffage that has a view, fo early
as in C. xi. 10 to the latter time of the
third wo ; and in the defcription of the
wo itfelf in C. xiii. 8, 12, 14, 3, 7: xvii,
2, 8 : xii. 12.

5. The Diiratlcn.
The marks of Time appear firft along
with the trumpets. Thofe of the firft,
fecond, third and fourth angel have no
marks of time : but thofe of the fifth, fixth
and feventh, have. Now of the woes un-
der thefe three laft angels, fhould only the
firft and fecond have their marks of time,
and not much rather the third? The prin-
cipal fcope of the times of the three woes
together is our information how long it will
be yet to the finifliing of the myftery of
God: and he who thus fuppofes a third

Part i. §. x. 95

wo without any mark of time, in a great
meafure frullrates the defign of the marks
of time fet to the firft and fecond wo ;
nay he will hardly be able to determine the
duration of the firft and fecond wo without
that of the third. Now there is no mark
of time for the third wo but in C. xii, xiii.
The firft wo has its duration allotted it by
the Locujis^ in the vifible -, the fecond by
the four Angeh let loofe, in the iwoifihle
w^orld: and the third by the Dragon^ in
the invifibky and partly alfo by the Beaft,
the fubftitute or deputy of the dragon, C.
xiii. 2, in the 'vifible world.

6. The Power,

This word Power (fS^o-i^i) is found In each
of the woes, C. ix. 3, 19 : xiii. 5, &c.

So manifold a refemblance of what we
reckon the third wo, to the firft and fecond,
no man can pronounce to be a human fic-
tion, or fliew fuch a refemblance to them
any where but in the fubjedl of C. xii, xiii.

in. T'he [even Vials are ?iot the third Wo.

I. The feven holy angels with their i^vtvi
vials have not the leaft Hkenefs, fo far
are they from having fo manifold a refem-

^6 Introduction.

blance to the firft and fecond wo, as the
miferies have of which the dragon and
the two beafts are the authors. 2. In

thofe clear paflages C. viii. 135 xiv. 6, &c.
there ftand in contrail ( i ) one who flies in
the midft of heaven and proclaims fome-
thing, and another who alfo flies in the
midft of heaven and proclaims fomething :
(2) The one cries Wo, Wo, Wo: the other,
on the contrary, has a Gofpel (suayfixiov) or
good 'T'idings. (3) The three woes have
their duration exprefsly mentioned : fo alfo
has the golpel or good tidings ; an everlaft-
ingnefs ^ (aiwv) ig afcribed to it. (4) The
three woes, and particularly the third, extend .
to the inhabitants of the earth : the good
tidings are to them that dwell on the earth,
namely, who tho' they are upon it, do not
adhere to it in their hearts. For which
reafon as the whole firft and fecond wo,
fo the third, as to the greater part of it,
muft certainly ftand before the everlafting
gofpel, and therefore much more before the

^ This word a»wv (a'ion) tevum has alfo its determinate
fignification, and denotes a fpace fomewhat more than two
thoufand years : as will be feen hereafter.

Part i. §. x. j^

feven vials. 3. The third wo comes

quickly after the fecond, viz, with the dra-
gon, the beaft &c ; on the contrary the
feven vials come long after ; for the vial of
the very firft angel is poured out on them
that had the mark of the beaft and worfliip-
ped his image, tho* this mark and image
came late, being the work of the other or
fecond beaft. 4. As the iirft wo was
caufed by the angel of the abyfs, and the
fecond by the four angels let loofe ; in like
manner the third is afcribed to the wrath of
the De^cil: on the contrary, by the {<tvtxi
vials the holy wrath of God is accompliihed,
5. As the third wo was checked, with re-
Ipedl to them that dwell on the earth, by
means of the everlafting Gofpel ; in like
manner the Authors of the mifchief had
their power reftrained by means of the {t\'^n
Vials under the third wo ; and confequent-
ly that wo was not firft brought on by the
itv^n vials.

For the fame reafons the third wo can

by no means be put off till the little feafon

of Sata?is being let loofe out of the abyfs ;

though the laft deception of the nations aC

^ N

98 Introduction.

that time has a refemblance to the machi-
nations of that enemy during the fiort
time^ C. xii. 13*

IV. In the ^hanfgiving of the Riders the third
Wo is indeed by the by mentioned beforehandy
but 7iot properly defer i bed C. xi. 18.

This Thankfgiving ftands between the
general contents of the trumpet of the fe-
venth angel and the execution of it -, and
there it is faid, toward the end of the
thankfgiving, that the time is come to dejlt^oy
thofe that dejiroyed the earth. If one looks
here for any thing concerning the third
wo, all that he will find is only the men-
tioning that the eaj'th was dejiroyed. Com,-
pare the places alledged in Concluf ii. Point
4, above in this §. Thofe deftroyers of
the earth fhall indeed be deftroyed in their
turn ; yet not by the third wo, but long
after it, at the time of the Dead and of the
Judgment: on the contraiy the third wo
falls upon the inhabitants of the earthy not
on thofe who lie in the lake of fire.

Now as all that is contained in this
thankfgiving is afterwards repeated again
and largely treated of 3 fo alfo are the de-

Part i. §. x, xi. 99

ftroyers of the earth defcribed at full kngth
under the third wo, in C. xiii.

V. The right Determimfim of the three ivoes
is a point 07i which very much depends.

He that cannot feparate from one another
the fecond wo and the paffagc in C. x. i —
xi. 13, will find that this is already a con-
iiderable ohftacle to the underftanding of
the prophecy. And he that cannot dlfcern
the third wo chiefly in the xili'^ chapter will
certainly find it his heft w^ay to concern
himfelf no farther about this book as a Pro-
phecy^ or to content himfelf with fingle paf-
faees here and there. But whoever is of
the fame mind with me, let him go on a-
long with me,

XL

We muft alfo under the trumpet of the
feventh angel accurately diftinguifli between
the Dragon's refidiiig in Heaven, on Eartl\
and in the Abyfs, and, after the little feafon,
in the luoke of Fire : as always after every
new fatanical device he muft get down
lower. For, after he had accufed the bre-
thren day and night before God, he muft
leave Heaven : after having raifed the third

100 Introduction.

wo upon Earth and carried it on during
the fhort time C. xii. I2, he muft go into
the Abyfs for a thoufand years : and after
deceiving Gog and Magog, in the little fea-^
fon C. XX. 3, into the Lake of Fire, where
he will be tormented for ever. Thus not
one of thefe four defcents runs parallel
with any other for one moment, but the
one always follows the other in the order
defcribed. If we invert this order, the
thing will appear yet more clearly : In the
Lake of Fire the Devil is tormented for ever;
not yet fo in the abyfs. In the Abyfs he is
bound; but not fo on earth. On Earth he
raifes the third wo : but can no longer
accufe the brethren before God, as he had
done in heaven.

XII.

What we mentioned above in §. ii^ con-
cerning the meaning of the feven Epiftles,
the feven Seals, the feven Trumpets, and the
feven Vials is now gradually become clearer
by what we have faid hitherto.
XIII.

Several men of lively imagination
would have the Jpocalypfe together with

Part i. §. xiir. loi

many other texts of the fcriptures of the old
and new teftament diftributed mXofeve?t Pe-
riods of the Times of the New Teftament ;
and that in fuch wife that to the firft period
fliould belong the firft epiille, the firft feal,
the trumpet of the firft angel, and the
vial of the firft angel ; and fo to the fe-
cond, third, and the reft of the periods one
after another, the fubfequent epifties, feals,
trumpets and vials : nay more, fometimes
they labour to find out a throughly equal
length of fuch periods, but neverthelefs in
the mean time expound the epifties or vials
to quite a different purpofe. Away v»'ith

fuch arbitrary fanciful devices ! which we
ftiall hereafter confute more at large, after
the expofition of the iii'* chapter. The
three woes have their appropriate Duration,
but of an unequal and always increafing
length : and between them are two Inter-
vals, which, tho' their length is not ex-
prefled, ought to be confidered as Periods of
time (as Refts are a part of a tune) as much
as the lengdi of the trumpets of the firft,
fecond, third and fourth angels, concern-
ing die times of which no nodce is given.

102 Introduction.

not even lb much as whether one ends fooner
or later, or at the fame time that another
begins. On the contrary there are, under
the trumpet of the feventh angel alone,
many long periods of time, in the whole
x^^, xi''', &c. to the xx'^ chapters. For
this reafon it is not fpeaking with propriety
to talk of feven Periods of '^hne^ even if it
were only in refpedl of the feven Trumpets;
whereas they are rather feven judgments or
Vifitations^ which indeed come to pafs one
after another, but have between them and
after tliem divers other periods, fome more
tolerable, and fome even joyful. And for
what reafon fhould the Space from St. fohvh
being in Patmos to the End of all things^ ra-
ther than the times of the old teftament by
itfelf, or than the times of the old and new
teftament taken together, be divided into
feven periods of time ? there is yet lefs
ground for making feven periods of time of
the feven churches and their angels, of the
feven feals, and of the feven vials. For
even fuppofing the feven trumpets were fe-
ven periods of time, yet it does not follow
that the churches, the feals and the vials.

Part i. §. xiii. 103

tho' there be feven of each of them too,
ihould point out feven periods of time: clfe,
the feven horns of the Lamb, the fcYtn
thunders, &c. muft alfo lignify feven Pe-
riods of time. Befides ; this w^ill appear to
be a fundamental maxim, tliat all that
comes to pafs as predicted in the Revelation
paffes quickly y except what is exprefsly com-
prifed in long lajiing periods. Thus the
trumpets of the three laft angels will reach
very far, partly into after-times, even to the
end of all things, partly backward, far into
the former centuries of the new teflament ;
and the trumpets of the four firft angels, as
no time is mentioned along with them, will
indeed take up lefs room, but withal will
reach yet farther backward : fo that the fe-
ven churches, the feven feals and the feven
vials, which with refped: to the whole of
their contents, and particularly as to marks
of time, are very different from the Trum-
pets, muft needs lignify fomewhat of quite
another kind tnixu periods of time.

104 Introduction.

Throughout the prophecy there are
exhibited to us four diffindl Circles or Spheres
of things, or by whatever more proper name
you pleafe to call them.

The feven Epijiles are direfted, the for-
mer part of each to the Angel of one of the
feven churches in Afa, and the latter to
the Univerfal Church of Christ, who pro-
mifeth to him that overcometh thofe glori-
ous rewards in the world to come C. ii, iii.

The feven Seals comprehend all vifiblc
and invifible creatures, as they are fubjedt
to the Lamb, and the Lamb opens, and
fully declares to them the divine decrees
that had been hidden till then C. v, &c.

' Compare this § with what is faid in the Gnomon on A-
foe. V. I . Ecclefio' funt Exemplar, &C ; that is,

The Churches are a Pattern according to which the Bo»
4y of the church in all ages and nations, and the teachers and
paftors of it, are to regulate their condudl.

The Seals exhibit the conferring of all Poiver in heaven
and on earth upon the Lamb.

The Trumpets Ihake and harafs the kingdom of the nuorlJ^
till at laft it becomes xht kingdom of God and of his Christ.

The Vials break the Poiver of the Beaji and of all that
are in union with him.

Keeping this Su^nmary always in view we fhall clearly dif-
cern the genuine order in which the Apocalj'pfe proceeds.

Part i. §. xiv, xv. 105

The feven Trumpets ftrike at the Kingdom

of the World till under that of the feventh

angel it becomes the Kingdom of God and

of his Christ, C. xi. 15.

The feven Vials reprefs and check the
diforders of the Beaft, &c. C. xvi. 2*- 10.
XV.
All this is implied in the Nature of the
contents of the epiftles, the feals, the trum-
pets and the vials : and peculiarly agreeable
to the nature of thefe contents are thefe deno-
minations of epiftles, feals, trumpets and vials,
as is alfo the Chronology (§. Iv), Yea the
particular fongs of praife and thankfgivings,
which refound at the unfolding of each
fphere, point alfo to this. That which we
find in C. i. 5, 6, along with the addrefs of
the epiftles to the kvtxv churches in Afia, viz.
Vnto him that loved uSy and wafied us from our
fns in his own bloody and hath made us kings
andpriefis unto God and his Father-, to him be
glory and dominion for ever and ever : That, |
fay, was fpoken in the name of the univerfal
Church of Christ. The angciick fong ot
praife> C. v. 12, Worthy is the Lamb that was
O

io6 Introduction.

Jlam^ to receive power ^ a?id riches y andwifdoniy
and Jirengthy and honour ^ arid glory ^ and blef-
Jingy fignifies the fame as if it had been faid.
It belongeth of right to the Lamb to open
the book and it's feven feals, and to have all
Power over things vi/ible and invijibk. Again,
the angelick fong of praife C. vii. 12, Blef-
fingy and glory y and wifdomy and thankjgivingy
and honour y and power y and mighty be unto
our God for ever and ever 3 indicates that
the Kingdom belongs to almighty God, and
that by the trumpets all fhall be brought
into fubjedlion to him. And when, on oc-
calion of the vials, 'tis faid C. xv. 3, 4,
Great and inarvellous are thy works y Lord
God Ahnighty 'y juji and true are thy waySy
thou King of faints. Who fall not fear T^heCy O
Lord, and glorify thy name ? for thou only
art holy: for all nations fall come andworfip
before thee 3 for thy judgments are made mani-
fef 'y in this the righteous punifment of the
Be aft and his worfippers is praifed. Hence
it appears that in this and other like places,
the T'hings or reprefentations, and the JVords
that accompany them, help to the fuller
explanation of one another.

Part i. §. xvi. 107

XVI.

When the divine Majefty is pleafed of
his own accord to difcover his fecret pur-
pofes and to put them in execution, he well
knows how to maintain at the fame time,
in a proper manner, the holy Reverence which
all creatures, and even the minifters too
and the witnefles and fpecftators of his ope-
rations, eternally owe to him ; and how to
require the Honour due to him. John, tho*
he had formerly been admitted to lean on
the bofom of the Lord, muft now in his
old age, juft as he had finifhed the courfe
of his apoftlefliip, although he was alfo
purified by his fufferings in Patmos, prefent-
\y fall at his feet as dead: and the kvQn
Churches^ and their angels muft prepare
themfelves, by repentance and perfeverance,
for what was declared and certified to them.
And thus it goes on at the beginning of
each fphere in the main vifion. Before the
opening of the feven Seals, all creatures muft
acknowledge their inability y and give honour
{C. v. 8 — 14) to the Lamb, who alone
was worthy to undertake it : before the fe-
ven trumpets is an excellent yS;;^ ofpraife to

ro8 Intr6duction.

God ; and upon the intervening opening of
the feventh feal there begins a refpeBful
fdencei after which the feven trumpets pow-
erfully found one after another : before the
pouring out of the itw^n Vials the fong of
Mofes and the fong of the Lamb was Jung:
and till thefe feven Plagues were fulfilled no
man cOiild enter into the temple which had
been opened.

XVIL
These four Spheres or Circles {land fo
related to one another that, ii^ the Expofi-
tion, one not only may fafely, but even mufi
of neceflity abide by the Order in which
the text places them. It is a miftake
to divide the book in fuch a manner that
this or that part ihall run out quite t6
the end of the world, and then the next
fliall begin again anew at the firft times
of the new teftament. Confider §. x, xiii.
Firft come the AddrefTes to the i^w^nChurches
and their angels : prefently after the {^wtn
Seals ^y and immediately, with the feventh
of them, the feven 'Trumpets y and laftly the
feven Vials, but not 'till under the trumpet
of the feventh angel.

Part i. §. xviii. 109

XVIIL

YeT my meaning is not, that in thi^
way of ordering or ranking, each part muft
be vv\io\\Y Jtnijhed before the fulfilling of th^
following part begins : for, if it were gene^
rally fo, there would have been no need of
mentioning particularly fuch ending of one
before the other began, on occafion of the
three Woes C. ix. 12; xi. 14. And thus
it does not follow from what has been faid,
that the Epiftles muft all be fulfilled before
the Seals were opened ; that the open'd
Seals muft be wholly fulfilled before the
Trumpets begin -, and that as to the Trum-
pets, even the feventh, muft be entirely over
before the Fials be poured cut. Things do
not go fo, ftep by ftep, from one verfe to
another : but all I fay is this ; that the Be^
ginning of every one part comes to pafs before
the Beginning of the next mentioned part . The
epiftles begin before the feals, the feals be-
fore the trumpets, the trumpets before the
vials ; one epiftle begins before the other,
one feal before the other, one trumpet ejpe^
daily before the other, and one vial before
the other. In this manner fomething may,

no Introduction.

without any breach of order, ftand before
another in the text and yet come after it
in the Execution : of which we have al-
ready had a fingular inftance in the begin-
nino- of § x» Yea fometimes that which
began later ends fooner, and that which
beo-an earlier reaches alfo far beyond the o-
ther. The Vials begin not till under the
trumpet of the feventh angel, and are quick-
ly over ; after which the trumpet itfelf be-
gins to manifeft its power anew. The Seals
begin before the trumpets ^ yet a long while
after the feventh angel had founded, the
fifth feal, for inftance, manifefts its operatipn
ftill, where the defire of the fouls under
the altar is fulfilled C. xix. 2. The Epiftles
come before the feals, and in the firft epiftle
the eating of the tree of life is promifed,
which is exhibited laft of all, along with
and in the new Jerufalem. All this agrees
quite well with the Contents of the epiftles,
feals, trumpets and vials as ftiewn in §
XIV. Above all, both the Beginning and the
Conclufion of the book treats of Christ,
who is the/r/? and the Iq/l.

Part r. §. xix. * m

XIX.

Whoever comprehends this order will
alfo rightly underftand the elegant Simulta--
neum, or that delicate manner of the text, by
which the one of two things, that belong pre-
cifely to the fame time, is often divided into
two parts, and, as it were, fplit; and the
other comes in unexpedtedly between thefe
two parts, as in a parenthelis. In this man-
ner concur thofe i?i the white robes^ and all the
angels, C. vii. 9, 10, (11, 12,) 13 — 17: the
talk of the elder with St. John, and the give-
ing the commijjion to the angels, vii. i.i, 12,
(13—17) C. viii. 2: th.c trwnpets of the feve?i
angels, and the burning of the inceijfe by another
angel, C. viii. 2. (3, 4, 5) 6: the oath of the
mighty angel, and the [even thunders, C. x. 3,
(4) 5: the cajling the dragon out of heaven^
and the fojig of praife in heaven, C. xii. o,
( I o — 12) 13: the voice from heaven, and the
faying of the Spirit, C. xiv. 13 : thefeven a/2-
gels with thefeven laji plagues, and thefong of
praife on the fea of glafs, and alfo the temple
filled with fmoak from the glory of God, C. xv:
the aBiojis ofthefixth angel with the vial, the
going out of the three unclean fpiritSy and the

112 Introduction.

warning to watchfulnefsy C. xvi. 12,(13, 14,
15) 16: in like manner the vial of the fiventh
cngel to^Qihtv with its Effe^s^ and that word
between. It is done^ C. xvi. 17, j8, (17):
the triumph of the faints^ and that of the an-
gely on the judgment of Babylon^ C. xviii. 20,
(2I-— 23) 24: ^t judgment of Babylon and
berfmoak^ and the Hallelujah between, C. xix.
2. (3) 3: Satan s being loofe^ and the firji re-
furre^lion^ C. xx. 3. (4—6) 7: the word of
St.John^ Comey and that of the Lorp Jesus,
Surely I come quickly, C. xxii. 20. Under
this head alfo rnay be reduced that Exprei-
fion in C. ii, iii. He that hath an ear &c, as
it is thrice fet before, and four times after the
Promife to him that overcometh; and fo h
fpoken at the fame time along with it. See
alfoC. ii. 10. iii. 8, xxi. 5, 6.
XX.
The feven feals, the feven trumpets and
the feven vials are all along divided into four
and three, in fuch wife that the four firft feals,
for example, have a peculiar connexion with
one another, and fo alfo the three laft. For
in the four firft feals 'tis always one of the
celeftial living creatures that calls St. John t(>

Part i. §. xx, xxi. 113
come; and there is a horfe of a particular
colour, and alfo his rider with peculiar
badees : but in the three laft there is neither
one nor the other. The trumpets of the
three laft angels are accompanied with three
woes and many other circumftances beiides
(§. X.), which are not found with the trum-
pets of the four firft : and thefe^ like the
vials of the four firft angels, have their
effed: on the earth, the fea, the rivers and
fountains of waters, and the fun : but the
trumpets and vials of the three laft angels
elfewhere. There may be obferved alfo a
divifion of the {even epiftles into four and
three, or three and four : But as thefe how-
ever have alfo fome Angular circumftances
befides, it will not be fo convenient to con-
fider them here in the Introduction as in the
Expofition. This Divifion is c/ear, impor-'
tant and uftfuL

XXI.

For the Fours are direfted to the four

Quarters of the world, as we fliall prove in

the Expofition. So in the four firft feals

the Lion looks toward the Eaft, the Bull

P

114 Introduction.

toward the Wert, the Man toward the
South, and the Eagle toward the North.
Likewife in the trumpets and vials, by the
Earth is meant Afta, by the Sea Europe,
by the Rivers and Fountains of Waters, and
alfo by the Trees that grow near them^
Africa-^ and all thefe lie under tlie Sun,
together with the Norths Eccl. i. 3.

XXII.

The T^hrees relate in fome meafure to in-
vilible things. Of the Sealsy the ffth re-
lates to the Souls under the altar : and un-
der the feventh Seal the fehjen Angels which
ftand before God, make themfelves to be
heard by the trumpets given to them. On
this occafion obferve, that the Angels them-
felves are much more confidered than the
trumpets : fince there is no mention made
of a firft and fecond, &c. trumpet^ but of
the trumpets (and fo afterward of the vials)
of the firft, fecond, third, fourth, fifth, fixth
and feventh Angela C. viii. 13; ix. 14 ;
X. 7. And with refped: to all thefe trum-
pets all Angels had before founded a feven-
fold praife, C. vii. 11, 12. Now, with
the fifth and feventh feals compare xho^fxth

Part i. §. xxir, xxiii. 1^5
that comes between them : and it will ap-
pear that it cannot be undcrflocd of any
thing but the hiferi or the dead that are in
mifery.

Under the "Trumpets of the fifth, fixth
and feventh angels, firil the Angel of the
Abyfs, afterward the four Angels that were
loofed, and at laft the Dragon himfelf,
brings on a Wo (each tainted with a deeper
malignity than another) upon the Inhabi-
tants of the Earth.

The Vials of the three laft anoels are
alfo much more fevere than the four former;
and in the vials of th.Qfixth ^nd fevenfb there
are confiderable traces that this fe verity iffues
from the invifble world, as well in the Vials
of the three laft angels, as in the Trumpets
of the three laft angels.

XXIII.

Wonderful, and very confpicious in
all this, is the Gradation in which the Evil
and the Good always advance and increafe,
till they come to the utmoft coiiflid with
one another, and in the end the Good ob-
tains the viftory due to it ; and in propor-
tion to this Increafe, the clearnefs of the

ii6 Introduction.

expreffion too becomes always greater. This
is to be feen iirft of all in the Spheres them-
felves which we have been hitherto confi-
dering : for a Book fealed and by and by
opened affedts and touches one pretty fenfi-
bly 3 a T!riimpet yet more fo ; but moft of
all a Vial poured out. So then, even in thefe
fpheres there is a gradual Advance from the
Fours to the Threes^ and in the Fours from
one Part to another, efpecially at the fourth
part, as it in its nature includes the three
preceding ; and fo it is alfo in the Threes.
As to the three Woes, this gradation has
been fpoken to in §. x, and xiii above,
and we fhall take a yet fuller view of it be-
low in §. XXIV, XXXI, Liii, and alfo in the
Expofition of thefe texts C. vi. 8, 9; viii. 12;
ix. 14, 15; xii. I, 4; xiv. 2; xv. i, 2; xvi.
II; xvii. 3; xix. 7; XX. 8; xxii. i, 6. By
this th^ pretended equality of Periods is eifec-
tually confuted.

XXIV.

But efpecially the Seventh is always the
moft important, or even more important
than all the fix together. For under the
feventh feal are comprehended the {qw^vi

Part, I. §. xxiv, xxv, xxvi. 117
trumpets : and under the trumpet of the
fevcnth angel, the feven vials, along with
feveral other things. So alfo the vial of tlie
fevcnth angel exceeds all the former.
XXV.
For this reafon the Seventh is always
uflier*d in by a preparation for it, as being
the moft important. The preparation for
the feventh »S'e'^/ confiils in the fealine of the
hundred and forty-four thoufand, C. vii.
The preparation for the' I'riimpet of the fe-
venth Angel, in the folemn oath in C. x, xi.
The preparation for the Vial of the feventh
angel, in an admonition to Vv^atchfulnefs,
C. xvi. 15. And therefore this Preparation
cannot properly be look'd upon as any part
cfthejixth leal, or of the trumpet or vial of
the fixth angel. In every Sixth the aitair in
hand is, as it were, broken off, and in the

Seve?2th refumed and comuleated.

i.

XXVI.

In the often-mentioned Spheres, and alfo
clfev/here, one circumftance and expreffion
always refers to the others, and that in fuch
a manner that they have many things like,
and many unlike one another. Now a re-

ii8 Introduction.

gular comparing of what is like or unlike
in each is a very great help to the under-
ftanding of them. This we will illuftrate
by examples.

I. Every one of the {even Epiftles con-
tains a glorious Tit/e of Jesus Christ, a
TeJiimo?2y concerning the ftate of the Angel
of the church, an Admonition fuitable to
that ftate, and a Promife to him that over-
Cometh. But only the Church of Smyrna
had, beiides thefe, 7iotice given of a tribu-
lation of ten days ; and the Angel of the
fame church is exhorted to be faithful unto
death y inftead of the coming of the Lord
notified to the other fix churches.

II. Of the firft, fecond, and fourth liv-
ing Creature it is faid, it was like a Lion,
a young Bull, an Eagle : on the contrary
the third had a Face as a Man.

III. The Horfeman in the firft Seal has
a Bow: he in the fecond gets a Sword: he
in the third has a Balance : the Horfeman
in the fourth has 7io fiich Emblem^ but in-
ftead of that he has a Name^ Death.

IV. Under the Trumpets of the three
laft Angels very many things are doubly ex-

Part i. §. xxvr. 119

preffed. For thtjive Months of the Locufts,
in the firft Wo, are mentioned twice-, as it
were for a warning that in thofe that follow
we fliould take notice of thefe expreffions
that are lefs manifejlly double. In the fecond
Wo, the Hour and the Day and the Month
and the Tear of the four Angels is mention-
ed but once; but this is compenfated by the
Nu?nber of the Horfemen which belongs to
this fame period of time. Alfo the Non-
chronos and tlie many Kings -^ likewife the
forty-two Months of the treading under foot
of the holy City, and the one thoufand two
hundred andfixty Days of the two Witneffes,
and many other things, are fet over againft
one another in C. x, xi. To the illuflrious
Woman in labour are afcribed, firft, one
thoufaiidtwo hundired and fixty Days ^ and after-
ward, a Time and lUmes and half a T'ime.
In the third Wo, the Beaft has forty-two
Months and the Number fx hundred andfixty-
fx. Hereafter come the thoufand years ^ three
times doubled. The new Jerufalem mea-
fures twelve thoifand Furlongs and one hun-
dred and forty 7neafures of a man, that is of
the angel. What all this and much more

I20 Introduction.

of the fame kind means, will be found in

the proper places.

XXVII.

From the comparifcn of fuch circum-
flances we may even deduce what thofe
Words and Phrafes that have often various
fignifications, as Angela Heaven^ Sun, Moo?!,
StaVy Sea, Earth, I'ree, Head, Horn, here-
after, quickly, &c. are to lignlfy in each
place. A Counter ftands without any hazard
of miftake, fometimes for one value, fome-
times for another, only as it is placed even
with others or between the rows : and the
fame is the cafe with fuch Words.

XXVIIL

This Prophecy has a "very particular vieisj
to the people of IfraeL Even the reproofs of
the falfe Jews are a commendation of the
true, C. ii. 9 > iii. 9. One of the Elders
fpeaks C. v. 5, like an Ifraelite, The hun-
dred forty 'four thoifand that were fealed
were of the twelve ^tribes of Ifrael; and in
general the frequent mention of I'ribes points
to this People. Of a piece with this is the
mention m^ade of King David, C. iii. 7 5 v-
55 xxii. 16; the Prophets^ C. x. 7^ the

Part i. §. xxviii. 121

Holy City, C. xi. 2 ; the Htll of Zion, C.
xiv. I; the Song of Mofes, C. xv. 3 ; Arma-
geddon, C. xvi. 16; Gog and Magog, C. xx.
8. The very Greek file of the Apocalypfe
agreeing fo much with the Hebrew idiom
points to Ifrael'y and as in C. xviii. 13 a
Latin word in the midft of the Greek text
points to Rome, and Jer. x. 1 1 a Chaldaick
verfe in the middle of the Hebrew text to
the Chaldeans -, fo do the Hebrew words,
Abaddon, Satan, Katigor, Amen, Hallelujah^
&c. in a particular manner to the Hebrews,
In the old Teftament almojl all the hijiory is
that of the people of Ifrael-, but fince tlie
days of 'titus and Adrian it is fcarcely re-
garded even as a By -work. No man has
more ufe for it than an Expoiitor of the
Revelation, as this Prophecy extends from
the old Jeriifalem which was dellroyed by
the Romans, even to the new 3 and thus this
holy people of Ifrael is of fo high Diftindlion
as reaches even into Eternity, C. xxi. 12,
24. The Apoftle of the Gentiles himfelf
fpeaks, on all occafions, of the Gentiles as
only Partakers with Ifrael In AJia in par-

Q

122 Introduction.

ticular were many IfraeliUs^ which were firft
converted by St. Paul, and afterward con-
firmed by St. Peter^s Epiftles, from Babylon
onward, A6ts xxi. i > i Pet. i. i. Thus in
thefe feven Churches of Afia the frjl Set
were IfraeliteSy and belonged fpecially to St.
John's infpedion» Lightfoot, in Hor. ad i
Cor. p. 270, fays, much to the purpofe,
V' James, Feter, and John went to the Cir-
*' cumcifion, and we can fhew the diocefe
" of each of them. James had Palejline
" and Syria: Peter, Babylon and AJfyria -,
'' and Jo/my the Hellenijis, particularly in
" AJia, and farther on." Hence it is that
AJia was fo proper a place for St. John to
fend the Revelation to. In Patmos he had
AJia and the Landoflfrael together in view.

At its proper time this will help great-
ly to the Conveijion of Ifrael, when Ifrael
fhall underftand what things yet avait
him, by virtue of this Book. Whoever
has the ability and opportunity to preis
home this argument, let him do it.

Part ii. §. xxix. 123

PART SECOND.

XXIX.

?^^^'^HE Obfervations and Reflexions
^ T 5^ which we have made hitherto, and
h^^^M much of what will follow after or
may be inferred from them, all tlie faithful
from St. John's days had the opportunity to
difcern, and to ufe for their benefit, even
before the fulfilling of the Prophecy began,
without the knowledge which we have from
hiftory of .the things which have followed
fince, without a glimpfe of our times and
our greatly enlarged asra : yet thefe make a
very confiderable ihare of the proper medi-
tations on all the parts of the Revelation.
Wherefore thofe are greatly miflaken who
think that one ought to make the principal
point of the expofition of the Prophecy to
confifl: in a ftrain'd interpretation with re-
ference to the civil or ecclefiaftical hiftory of
ihcprefent Times, or even in an idle fearch
after what may be the nex^ thing to come,

124 Lntroduction.

that is, indeed, after premature news-, by
which however a puzzled conjefturer or
diviner would be as little improved, if he
fliould guefs it before-hand, as if he had
come to his iirft knowledge of it by the
event. Tet it is right that we have an eye
aifo to the Scope of the Book (which is
properly prophetical) and attend to the ful-
filling of it ; that we may the better ac-
knowledge and magnify God in his faith-
fulnefs, wifdom, juftice and almighty pov/er;
and learn to accommodate ourfelves to the
times according to the various patterns fet
before us in the prophecy,

XXX.

This Prophecy is like a cloud richly full
of frudtifying rain that fpreads over a large
extent of land, which flieds fome part of
its waters on e^'oery ground in its turn by
ftreaks or fpots. What belongs to each
particular time the believers of that age may
turn to their advantage in a fpecial manner,
and that too from time to time more and
more fully. Thofe things chiefly that ftand
foremoft in the book turned to good account
to the antients^ even in the time of the

Part ii. §. xxx, xxxr. 125
completion : other things are ?2ow a fulfillingj
and thefe are the moft needful, the moft
confiderable, and moft falutarv for ics. The
remaining part belongs principally to pojieri-
ty-y and the farther the completion advances,
fo much the clearer will the whole be.
XXXI.
Let us now confider the Prophecy with
regard to our own T^irnes^ and we fhall find
thefe folio v/ing points that deferve to be
ferioufly confidered by us.

I. The Completion began very foon after
the book was written, C. i. i.

II. The Completion reacheth even to the
End of the world, C. xx. 1 1 ; yea quite in-
to Eternity, C. xxii. 5.

III. The Com.pletion extends, according
to the exadly coherent order of the book,
from St. John's being in Patmos, without
interruption, through all the remaining ages,
in one range, to the end of the world, C. iv.
I : at leajl, this holds true with regard to
the feven trumpets , which is fufficient for
our prefcnt purpofe.

IV. The things that muft come to pafs
iCcme quickly znd Jpeedi/y to pafs, except thofc

126 Introduction.

that are exprefsly comprifed in determinate
times of great length, C. i. i. The Prophecy
is Hke a piece of mufick which goes, on the
whole, prejlo (which is mark'd once for all
at the beginning of the lines) but in the mid-
dle goes now and then piano ^ which is figni-
fied by particular marks at the proper places.
V. The firft Wo ends before the fecond
begins ; and the fecond ends before the
third begins. For when the firft wo is paft,
it is not faid there are come^ but there come
or are comings yet two woes hereafter ; and
again, when the fecond wo is paft, 'tis not
faid the third wo is come, but behold // cometh
•or is corning quickly, C. ix. 125 xi. 14.
Whoever takes thefe phrafes for mere forms
of tranfition (none of "which fort are to be
-met wdth in the Revelation) charges the
prophecy with great inaccuracy. A lad at
fchool would not make ufe of the words,
to pafs, to come, behold, hereafter, and quickly,
to fuch purpofe in an exercife. In fa6t
there are two intervals between the firft
and fecond, and the fecond and third woes.
The word, to come, in every place intimates
fomething real.

Part ii. §. xxxi. 127

VI. In the firft of the now cited phrales^
we find the word hereafter^ and in the fe-
€ond the word quickly, Thefe two words
would not be fo rightly compared with o-
ther paflages in this book as with one ano-
ther, and mull: be interpreted from fuch
eomparifon : the conclufion from which is,
that the arrival of the third wo is at a much
lefs diftance from the end of the fecond than
it was from the end of the firft, when it was.
only faid to be coming hereafter,

VII. To the third wo belongs the Jhort
time the Devil, fo full of wrath, had upon
the earth, C. xii. 12.

VIII. Thy. forty "two months of the Beaft
make the moft part oithat fliort time,C.xiii.5«.

IX. The fecond wo lafts an hcitr^ and a
day, and a month, and a year ', the firft, 7?i'^
months, C. ix.

X. In cppoftion to all the three woes to-
gether is fet that Gofpel or glad Tidings
which the angel proclaims before the end
of the third wo : and fince this is called
glad T'idings of an (a;wi/) ^ Mvum, there is

''The Englilh Tranflators unacquainted with thefe ideas
render thefe words the (or better, as in the margin) an ivir-
Ufiing Gof^eL

128 Introduction.

therefore, from the flying of this angel to
the end of the world, yet remaining an
JEiJim y which muil be a pretty ^ long pe-
riod of time, C. xiv. 6.

XL Since the time of St. John's being
at Patmos there are already paffed upv/ards
of "" one thoufand fix hundred and forty
years, C. i. lo. And yet

XII. Babylon is ftill {landing at this
day, C. xviii ; nor is the treading underfoot
of the holy City come to an end, C. xi. 2 — 13.

XIIL The Overthrow of the Beajl comes
not till after the dejlrudion of Babylon^ C.
xvii. 16.

XIV. The thoufand years ^ in which Satan
is bound, do not begin till the overthrow of
the Beaji, C.xix. x. See §. xi.

XV. After thefe thoufand years Satan
is to be loofed a little feaf on, C. xx. 3.

XVI. At the beginning of that little fcafon
the fouls of them that were beheaded, &c,
live : and from that tim.e till the living

» Viz, for the Happinefs of it to make amends for the
miferies of all the three Woes, which it is fet to counter-ba-
lance; fee S- XI— XVI ; where this is plainly Ihewn.

"» Viz, A°. 1740, when this was publilhed : 'tis now
1660 years from A". 96.

Part ir. §. xxxi. jzg

again of the refl of the dead are one thoiifajid
years, C. xx. 4.

XVII. The World is not to laft quite fo
long after the death of Christ as it had
flood (viz, about " three thoufand nine hun-
dred and eighty years) before it, C. i. 3 ;
Heb. ix. 26.

XVIII. The Fulfilling of the Prophecy
muft not be reckoned to fall either moftly
in the firft centuries, nor too much in the
times that are yet to come ; but be applied,
by a nearly equal partition, to the whole
courfe of the times of the New Teftament,
in fuch a manner that the whole body of
all true hiftory of Jews and Gentiles, Chrif-
tians and Turks, may concur to the expofi-
tion, from firft to laft, C. iv. i : yet fo that
in the mean time invifible things neither be
negleded nor interrupt the other, §. iv.

The xii'^ of thefe points, on which
much depends, namely, that Babylon flmdd
yet be jlanding in our time, our predecefTors
could not fee. So it is no arrogance in us
to hope and endeavour to go beyond them
R

« Exaftly, three thoufand nine hundred and feventy-one
years and fix months.

130 Introduction.

in the underftanding of the prophecy, by
making ufe of the great advaiitage which a
view of our prefent time gives us. Whoever
is in any doubt about this, or the firft, or
any other of thefe points, let him turn to the
paflages of the text cited after them and the
expoiition of them : and whoever is in hafle
prefently to have the whole compared with
hiftory and illuftrated by it, may pleafe to
compare it with the table in the Conclulion;,
but neither admit nor rejedl what is there
more nearly determined, till he fhall have
examined the proofs he will find in the
progrefs of thefe meditations..
XXXII.

From hence flow thefe following jull
Conclufions 5

I. That the middle wo, namely the fecond,
that broke out about Euphrates ^ muft be inter-
preted of the power of the Saracefis, after the
death oiMahomet^ under the firft and moil; per-
nicious *' Caliphs. People may ftrive to place
this wo higher or lower in hiflory than about
the days oi Mahomet -, but then they will ru7i
counter to the jufl-now mentioned points \

f So the Kings or Princes of the Saracens were titled.

Part ii. §. xxxii. 131

and befides will ?iot fold €i\htv fufficient room
for the great things that, in the text, go
before the lecond wo, and the yet greater
things that, in the text, follow after the
fecond wo, nor any hiflories of times paft
to fuit them.

II. That the iirft wo, whatever it was,
was over before Mahomefs, days.

III. That the trumpets of the four firft
angels followed, ?20f long after the vifion of
St. John.

IV. That the third wo is not yet over^
tho' it began a long time ago.

We may juftly look upon fhefe four Con-
clufions as the Foundation-ftones of the build-
ing of a true Expofition, as far as concerns
the Comparing of the Prophecy with the
Events. For whoever compares thefe Con-
clulions with what has been faid hitherto in
the Introdu^ion, and then reads over the
text, will, it is prefumed, perceive that all
the parts of the building are regularly con-
nected together. People may turn and wind
the thing this way and that way as they
pleafe, yet they will never make out anything
much different from this, tliat will hold.

132 Introduction.

PART THIRD.

XXXIII.

r^'^^'miUS far even thofe that have no
^ ^ ^ extraordinary tafte for great exad;-
k-'^^j^jJ nefs in Ch?'072ology may have wil-
lingly born us company; and fuch w^ill even
thus go a great way in underftanding the pro-
phecy, with only the help of what we have
already advanced. But I fhould be un-^

grateful to the Fountain of light, if I fhould
conceal that the Supputation of the Times or
the Chronology has been that very track
by walking in which I came to this Analyfis,
though I have now, in the foregoing part of
this IntroduBion^ laid it before others with-
out the computation of the times. The
right Analyfu of the SubjeS-matter and the
triieRecko?ii?ig oftheT'inm or Chronology greatly
affift and fupport one another. Hitherto we
have mention'd only the party we had moft
Qccafion for, of the Analyiis of the Subject-
matter: now we will treat of the Chronology
7ncre at large-^ that hereafter in the Expofi-

Part hi. §. xxxiii, xxxiv. 133
tion we may not be long detained about it,
but may be the more at freedom to confider
the Things themfelves.

XXXIV.
Now at this ftep, when we fliould prepare
ourfelves for an enquiry into the prophetical
times, many will be feized with a dread or
averfion. But as Jesus Christ in his Re-
velation has revealed T'hwgs and 'Times to-
gether; though we may now and then con-
fider the one without the other and reap be-
nefit therefrom, yet muft we not feparate
them too far from one another, fince He
has not joined them together in vain. The
Things are the principal, and the Times are
difcovered for the fake of the things. We
mufi: give each their due in a fuitable mea-
fure. One that curforily picks up fomething
and repeats that, ads like a traveller w^ho
on coming to a ftrange city fhould content
himfelf with having heard the clock ftrike
twice or thrice, and never trouble himfelf to
enquire after the conftitution ecclefiaftical
or civil, or any other thing worthy his no-
tice. Now the Revelation is like a great
and elegant, magnificent and facred Tem-
ple, which is not without its clock, its bells

134 Introduction.

and its dial, to give notice of the hours at
which divine fervice is to be performed :
but a perfon of a right difpofition not only
looks at the dial on the out-fide, but rather
goes into tlie temple at the proper hour.
Gifts are diverfe in this refpect alfo, and,
to go on with the comparifon, tho' many-
leave the care of the hours to them to whom
it particularly belongs, and who by their at-
tention thereto are ferviceable to the church;
yet fuch people are neceffary. Whoever
goes upon a wrong Chronology, certainly
fo far falls iliort in the Subjed-matter : but
he who judges rightly of this^ will never
advance any thing that will be found repug-
nant to the true Chronology, even tho* he
iliould be unacquainted with it. In the
inean time if Ave fet aiide the conlideration
-of the Times, we ihall not be able, either to
nidge rightly of the Things themfelves that
are included in certain determinate times (at
leaft evidently and fully) — or to diftinguifh
the events and occurrences of one j^ge from
thofe of another, that often refemble them,
and even fometimes look more plauiible ; —
^r any m.an clearly to prove to others that

Part hi. §. xxxiv, xxxv. 135^
this or that particular interpretation is right

or wrong. 'T'is the true Ch^ouclogy that

turns the J c ale at lajl.

If any one chufes to ftop here, there is
no con draining him to go on. But if he
has a mind to make a trial how far we may
wade into this part of Chronology without
going out of our depth, he will at leaft not
wholly loofe his labour.
XXXV.

Sometimes mention is made of T'imes
in a general way^ as C. i. 3, the time is at
hand', ii. 21, /pace to repent -, iii. 10, the hour
of temptation^ &c. But our inquiiy is not
now about thefe, but about deter?ninate^
numbered, meafured periods of t2?ne that have
a relation to one another. And here let us
fee how many and what variety oi fuch times
prefent themfelves to us throughout the book j

( I ) ten Days of tribulation to the Church
of Smyrna :

( 2 ) a Chrojios, to the fouls under the altar :

(3) about the fpace of half an Hour, in
which there was filence in heav^en :

(4) five Months of the locufts, in the firft
wo ; twice over :

136 Introduction.

(5) an Hour, and a Day, and a Mo?ith,
and a T^^r, of the four angels in the fe-
cond wo :

(6) a Non-chronos, or fpace of time lefs
than a Chronos, between the oath of the an-
gel and the finiihing of the myftery of God :

(7) forty-two Months, during v/hich the
holy city fhall be trodden under foot :

(8) the one thoufand two hundred and
lixty Days of the two witneifes :

(9) the three Z)/^jj and half of the fame:

(10) the one thoufand two hundred and
lixty Days of the woman :

(11) the fhort T^hjie of the dragon, in
which the third wo falls :

(12) the Hlme, and Times, and half a
'Time, of the woman :

(13) the forty-two Mo7iths of the beaft^
in the third wo :

(14) the Number of the beaft, 666:
(That this belongs to this head we fliall
find hereafter.)

(15) an Aion or Mvum, attributed to
the good tidings proclaimed by the angel :

(16) 2ifiort Space, that the other king is
to continue :

Part hi. §. xxxv. 137

(17) one Hour m which the ten kings re-
ceive power with the beaft -, likewife one
Hour of the judgment and defolation of
Babylon :

(18) a thoufand Tears, in which Satan
is bound :

(19) a little Seafon or ChronoSy in which
he is to be let loofe :

(20) a thoufand Tears , in which the fouls
reign with Christ :

^ [The word I'ime, in N^ 1 1 and 1 2, is
put for the Greek word (j^at^o?) Kairos. In
N\ 2, 6, and 19, the Greek word {x^ovoq)
Chronos is retained, and in N°. 19 it may be
retained, tho' our tranflation renders itfcafon.
So alfo is the Greek word (^ccim) Aion, or the
hatin /Evujn, which is form'd from it.

The iirft of thefe words. Time, is by
means of our tranflation, become familiar to
us in the fenfe of a certain determinate fpace
of time. Our language has no word to ex-
prefs fuch periods of time as are here meant
by Chronos and Aioji.']

S

P This paragraph, concerning the TVords ofTimf ufed in
this Tranjlatio?!, I fubllitute for the Author's explanation of
his German Therms.

138 Introduction.

Now we h3.YC /even Naines of Parts of
Time, viz. Hour^ Day, Month, Tear, T^ime,
Chronos and Aion, Th^foiirjir/i are of more
determinate figniiication than the three latter.
Of thefe laft therefore we fhall fay nothing
till we have paved our way to them by help
of the former.

Whether an expofitor who dilpenfes
with and excufes himfelf from 2iny Refolution
of all thefe times, or looks upon them as
of no concern, gives the due honour to the
wifdom of God, let any man judge. Cer-
tainly they muft be all throughly regarded,
attended to, and treated of in fuch a man-
ner as is fuitable to the majefty of God and
the importance of this fhort Manifesto;
not as a bare decoration^ garniture or imple-r
ment, without which the book might ne-
verthelefs have had its right form and faih-
ion ; but as an important and necejfary part,
efpecially confidering that many of thefe pe-
riods are expreffed, deliberately and with
great emphafis, oftner than once (Pfal. Ixii.
11). If any man cannot, for his part, fee
th€ great importance of this, yet ought he

Part hi. §. xxxv, xxxvi. 139
not to be fo rafh as to feek to derogate front
it, or to iet other people againft it.

XXXVI.

The above-enumerated periods confifl: of
Numbers^ and of Names of Times. The
Numbers many are willing to take as pre-
cifely as will fuit with their fcheme ; but
when they don't come right, they take re-
fuge in this evalion, ' It is a certain number

* put for an uncertain, we muft not take it^^
^ precifely: God has referved fuch knowledge

* to himfelf ?' But here, what we are talkins:
of, is wbatGoD has revealed in the Scriptitres-y
and in the Scriptures it is taken exadlly,
precifelyy and certainly. In the Revelation,
C. viii. I, you find the particle about ufed,
when it might be a little more or lefs than
the time there mentioned ; a token that in
other places, where there is no fuch word,
we may not prefume to take the time to be
indefijiite. A certain round number, or in
its figures refembling a round number, may
fometimes be put for an uncertain, as Matth.
xviii. 12, 21, 22, 24, 28 i and then an in-
terpreter is not to be over-curious in his re-
fearches. But where there arc uneven^ im^^

140 Introduction,

common numbers, confifting of 'various ci-
phers^ and even Fraciions^ we muft not
take them as we do a proverbial expref-
fion. Thus there is no making one thoiifand
two hundred and fifty y or one thoiifand two
hundred and fe^venty^ out of the one thoufand
two hundred and fixty days of the two wit-
neffes: nay, not one thoufand two himd?'ed fif-
ty-nine and a half or ojie thoufand two hundred
fixty and a haf: hkewife neither three nor
four days out of their three and a haf days j
although perhaps it may be no matter for
an hour or two over or under the half day.
Surely when an Hour^ and a Day^ and a
Month, and a Tear is mentioned, wx muft
not on any account negledl the Hour, The
Text is an Original, the Expofition is as
it were a Copy of it. The nearer this comes
up to that fo much the better it is. And
now we come to treat of the Names of time.

XXXVII.

The firft in nature, of all the Names of
time is a Day : for from the divifion of it
arife hours, and of days are made months,
years, &c. Therefore many expofitors begin
their refolutions of the times with the Day r

Part hi. §. xxxvii. 141

with whofe method we muft comply while
we are examining their opinions. Now
whether the many periods of time extradied
from the text in the order in w^hich they lie
there, in §. xxxv, are all to be put on the
footing of a natural day, properly fo called,
or all on that of a prophetical day fo called
in a figurative fenfe (which many take to
be a natural year) or fome on the one and
fome on the other \ is impoffible to be de-
termined now^ while we are but juft entring
on the refolution of the times. However
there is no doubt but that in the three Woes
we are to put the five months of the locufts,
the hour and the day and the 77ionth and the
year of the four angels, and the forty-two
months of the beaft upon a like footing ;
whether it turn out to be that of a natural
or of a prophetical Day : for otherwife the
duration of the three woes would remain an
infoluble riddle, and we fhould loofe the
proportion or even the gradation that is in
them. Therefore we will begin "^ again

at this place as the eafieft.

^ As above in §, ix.

142 Introduction.

XXXVIII.

The queftion. What a Day /j, in the
three Woes ? is not to be anfwered fo very
haftily : Firft we will lay down this pofition ;
A Day here camiot fignify a whole Tear-,
For thofe times of the three woes toge-
ther, which we have mentioned in §. xxxvii,
by themfelves alone make up at leaft fixty
months. Now if a Day is here equivalent
to a Year, and a prophetical Month is to
confift of thirty fuch days, and a Year of
twelve fuch months, according to the opi-
nion of many : thefe fixty months alone
will take up full one thoufand eight hundred
Years. And is there room enough too be-
fides for the things that come to pafs before
the firil wo, for the interval between the
firft and fecond wo, for that between the
fecond and third wo, and for all that paffes
in the third wo itfelf, before and after the
forty-two months of the beaft, for the ever-
lajiing Gofpel which the angel announceth
tov/ard the lateft times of the beaft, and
laftly for the ample contents of the xx'^ chap-
ter ? Or {hall we, v/hen prefs'd with thefe
difficulties, take up with the fancy of thofe

Part in. §. xxxviii. 143

who of the thoufand years make but a
thoufand months or the age of a man ?

If any fliould pretend that by a Day is
meant a Tear in feveral places of the Scrip-
tures, as Numb, xiv. 33, 34; Ezek. iv. 5,
6 ; Dan. ix. 24, 25, 26; and Z/2/>^^xiii. 33;
he is to be anfwered thus, The fourth of
thefe places fpeaks of natural days ; as is re-
marked in the Harmony of the E'vangelijls
§. 126. The third is nothing to our pre-
fent purpofe ; for the word Day is not men-
tioned in it, but the Week immediately be-
tokens a njoeek of years. In the fecond, a
Day is only to reprefent a Year. And in the
firft, a year of punifliment is appointed for
each day of their fm : It is not faid, Your
children fliall wander in the wildernefs forty
days^ that is, forty years. The word day
is not any where in the Scripture put for
the word year ; as Bifliop Forbes^ on the A-
pGcalypfe, p. 85, has ' long ago obferved :
but if it was fo put any where elfe, it does
not follow that it mull be fo in St. John too;

*■ In the time of Kins: James the firfl, that excellent man
was Bp. of Aberdeen and Chancellor of that Univerfity ; in
which and in his Diocefe he made fuch a reformation and im-
provement as make his memory to be honoured to this d?.y.

144 Introduction.

as the Meafure in RenjeL xxi is different from

that in Ezek. xl.

If one comes at firjl to the knowledge of
the Times by the help of the k?20wledge he
has of the Subied-matter, he will aftej-wards
come to a moi'e exadi knowledge of the Matter
by tlie help of that of the Times : and fo
always alternately (yet no circidus vitiofiis)
every fc7vner difcovery will be brought to
greater exadtnefs by xht following.

Thus the prefent argument is remarkably
ilrengthened by tliis confideration, that we
cannot put the beginning of the fecond wo
before Mahomet, For the Hour and the
Day and the Month and the Year make,
by the Day of a year long, three hundred
and ninety one years. Now if we fliould be-
gin juft at the year 622, in which the cala-
mities of Maho?nctif?n broke out (for farther
back w^e cannot go) it reaches to the year
1013. What fliall we reckon after that
year for the Interval betw^een the fecond and
third wo? Where ihall the forty-two Months
of the beaft, which by this way of reckon-
ing lafl: 1260 years, I will not fay end, but
even begin ? Where fhall we difpofe of all

Part hi. §. xxxviii, xxxix. 14^
the events under the third wo, that happen
before and after thefe forty-two months oi"
1260 years, from C. xii. 12 to C. xx. i ?
And where is there room for the times men-
tioned in the xx'^ chapter, together with
the everlafting Gofpel ?

Again; How can (to fpeak in particular
of the third Wo) the time that the enraged
Devil hath, which begins a confiderable
while before the forty-two months and does
not end till after them, be called 2iJJ:ort oney
when the forty-two months alone lafl 1^60
whole years ? Certainly the fhort time which
the Devil hath, who is the more enraged
on thh very account, viz. of its fhortnefs,
IS fhorter than that of the thoufand years of
his being bound, which comes afterwards i
and fo alfo much more is the power of the
beaft during his forty-two months fhorter
than the thoufand years in which thofe
reign who were put to death by the beaft*

XXXIX.

So then we need not go far for an anfwer
to that queftion, What is the matter that
hitherto nothing has hit right in e:>cpotinding this
T

146 Introduction.

Book, even with thofe who value it moji highly^:
and whyfo many of their Prognojiics have fail-
ed? The Reformers themfelves did not, but
afterwards 7nany protejlant expofitors, tho'
not all thofe,. nor thofe alone, have highly
cryed up this Tear-day or Day fignifying a
Year 5 and tius out of the forty-^two Months,
the 1260 Days, and the three and a half
Times have made one calamitous period of
1260 Years. Then they pitched upon fome
year in the fifth or fome earlier or later cen-
tury, that appeared to be a remarkable one,
and added to that the 1260 Years : the fum
gave the term or end of their period. There
were fo many fiich terms, that at laft fome
one or other of the inventors of them fhould,
one would think, have hit by chance on the
right term, tho' he had ijot found out either
the right beginning or the right length of
that period which he made choice o£ This
pretended period oi 1260 Years was like a
large chefl: where every kind of heterogene-
ous things (or things of different natures)
were thrown in together : but the true Apo-
calyptical periods are like many fmall drawers
in a fine and artfully contrived cabinet, each

Part in. §. xxxix. 147

of which contains only things homogeneous
or of the fame kind.

He who has once laid afide this prejudice
of the Tear-Dayy will find out the root of
inoft of ^Q forced interpretations : and if he
knows of any inquifitive friend, will caution
him agairrfl: a fruitlefs labour in which ma-
ny have wafted the greateft part of their
life-time.

Most interpreters have begun their ima-
ginary period of 1260 years, at the year 476
and before it. But as that term is already
paft, in the year 1736, without any confi-
derable event : fo, fox a long time after the
year 476, there arc not to be found in hif-
toiy any more later Epochs- for the 1260
years in which a man might take refuge
with any plaufibility. And yet there is a
geiiernl ExpeBation of a 7iearly approaching
Revohition^ even among thofe who obferve
only the prefent conjun(!l:ure of aiFairs, with-
out any view at the fame time to the word
of Prophecy. This period of 1260 years,
and confequently the Year-day, has yet
fome patrons that have been accufto/ued to

143 Introduction.

defend it ; but it will foon totally vanifh,
compare the Gnoirion on Revel, xi. 2.
XL.
Matters might be more eafily adjufted
by thofe that fhould take a Day in the
lifual acceptation of the word for twenty-four
Hours, This opinion is not only very com-
mon in the church of Rome, but alfo at
this time much liked by many Proteftants
in Germany. Peter/ens, Syftem ftands upon
this footing as it interprets the birth of the
Man-Child of the converfion of the people
of Ifrael'y which is yet to come 5 but which
according to him muft be before the fhort
time, viz. three years and a half, of the
diftrefles under Antichrift : which implies
that the times of the three woes are to be
underftood in the fenfe of common Days.
Now tho* many of thofe who have a hearty
concern for the knowledge of the truth,
adhere fo ftrongly to this opinion, that it
might be hard to perfwade them fo much as
to give a hearing to another interpretation ;
yet let mc in all good humour, allure them,
they are mijlaken.

Part hi. §. xl. 149

These points will often fall in- our way
in the courfe of our meditations : but parti-
cularly the common Day will by no means
fuit in the three Woes. For,

I. In the firft wo, men were not killed,
but tormented. Now it is true that very
great plagues may pafs over very quickly,
as in the cafe of the feven laft plagues: but
here, in the cafe of the Locufts, no plague,
however great otherwife, which lafts but
five common months, can bear any propor-
tion to the contents of the whole book, and
elpecially to the trumpets of the foregoing
and following angels.

XL In the fecond wo, the third part of
men were killed : and this looks more like
a long4ajling plague of War (by w^hich the
furvivors ought to have been brought off
from that idolatry which had continued fo
many ages, and from their other crimes)
than a ravage that was o'ver in a year and a
few days (as the conpnon Day would make
it), and after which the remaining two
thirds of men go on in their idolatry and
other crimes without repentance.

15Q Introduction.

IIL In the fame wo, the Cavalry, the
number of whom St. John heard, and has
^xpreffed fo precifely, confifts of fome hun-
dred milhons of foldiers. Whether all the
countries of the world can afford fuch a pro-
digious number of men and horfe in a com-
mon Hour, Day, Month, and Year, I leave
to be eftimated by thofe who underftand
politics and the affairs of war. Some learn-
ed men have made it their ftudy to reckon the
number of manldnd living at one time : the
largeft reckoning might amount to a thotifand
millions^ and the loweft to half the number-
How is it that the number which St. John
heard comes fo near to this ? How much
finaller muft be the number of Adult people,
how much fmaller that of the Males, how
much that of Soldiers, and yet lefs that of
Horfemen ! Befides that all thefe horfemcn
-are diffind: from the third part of men
whom they killed, and from the remaining
two thirds that were not killed.

IV. In the third wo, the forty-two Months
of the beaft cannot by any means be re*
ftrained to three and a half common years ;
reckoning, as I do, tliefe forty-two months

Part hi. §. xl, xli. 15T

to only the five firfl; heads of the beaft. But
thofe who extend them to all the feven
heads fucceeding one another, will find it
ftill more difficult to adjuft their Reckoning.
In the time of the continuance of the beaft,
after the forty-two months are elapfed^ falls
out the laft fhew of the pride of Babylon,
and the judgment of her : and a Jl:ort con-
tinuance is afcribed to only the laft of the
feven kings or heads of the beaft : fo that
his immediate predeceflbr, nay even the.
five other kings that were yet more early,
muft, by virtue of the antithefis, have a
longer continuance ; and yet under the fhort
continuance of the laft there happen fueh
things as require a confiderable fpace of time.
More arguments againft the Year-day
and againft the Day of twenty-four hours wilt
arife hereafter in §. xliv. N° xi.

XLI.

If the prefent Inquiry into the Times
was, to fet it at the loweft, of no other ufe
or advantage than this, that people may
perceive on what fort of a fowidation fo ma7iy
indifferent^ Jirained and irregular Epcpoftions

1^2 Introduction.

are built : tvtn That would be worth all
the labour of it; Why is it that the Ro-
man^catholic Expofitors of this Prophecy
cannot by any means make their fcheme cbn^
fiftent with it? chiefly, indeed, by reafon of
the badnefs of their caufe ; but next to that,
becaufe in order to put the beft face upon it
that they can, they take refuge in the com-
mon Day of twenty-four hours. The
Proteftants, as to their caufe, have much
the better of them: but withall, thofe expo-
fitors who adhere to the Tear-day are driven
upon unfurmountable obflacles. On this
ground then we may fettle our judgment of
the expofitors of thefe two, ^ndof all the other
clafTes. For example; the mgtmous Jtirieu
eagerly embraced and adopted the Year-day,
and confequently the antichriftian period of
1260 years.: and therefore it was an eafy
matter for the eloquent Bojfuet to rebuke
him, and others in the fame way, for fo
many inconfiftencies. Hereupon the other
Champions for the Papacy are become more
fecure and bolder, and make as if they had
nothing more to fear now from the Revela-
tion itfelf, but had fully overcome it, and

pAitT in. §. XLI, XLII. Ij^

Were authorized to pronounce, without far-
ther examination, all arguments againft the
Papacy drawn from the Apocalypfe to be
mere folly and madnefs. See how arrogant-
ly the Editor of the "Journal de 'Trevoiix^ Apr,
1706, p. 705, enters the lifts and glories
(over Vitringa no lefs than over 'Jurieu) in
Grofius and his followers i But thefe people
themfelves come off yet much worfe, for
they ground themfelves on the Day of twen-
ty-four Hours. Jurieu has managed a good
caiife badly \ and the Journal has made a bad
caiife ?iot a whit better, Vitringa has fet afide
both the year-day and the twenty-four hour-
day; and fo far departs both from Gi^otim
and Jurieu, Confequently the proper Evi-
dence agdnft the Papacy is not overthrown
by this groundlefs comparifon of Jurieu and
Vitrifiga. It is better to ufe no reckoning
of times than a wrong one 3 but a right
reckoning is ffill better.

XLIL

The amomnil of our reafoning hitherto
is only this^-«-A prophetical Day in thfC three

V

154 Introduction.

Woes is fhorter, and even by virtue of the
reafons given, conjiderably fiorter than a whole
Tear ; but longer, and for the fame reafons,
confiderably longer than a common Day. All
the Expofitions of the Apocalypfe that are
in requeft in our days tie themfelves dow^n
either to the Year-day, or to the twenty-
four Hour-day : and fincc in that refped;
they are all of them greatly in the wrong
(as we have already proved) the true Expo-
fition mull, by neceffary confequence, be
grounded on a reckoning of time very con-
trary to the received opinions. So a lover
of truth muft from this place forward pre-
pare himfelf to bear with the prophetical
Day, let the length of it, refulting from
our arguments, appear ever fo Jirange to
him : for an expofitton which has nothing un-
C07nm07i on this head^ is a falfe one. The
truth, as in many other cafes, lies certainly
in the Middky between the two extreams,
and accordingly in contradiftindlion to both
thefe fo widely diffant extreams, we fhall,
when there is occafion, call this the Middle
Reckoning. The ftraiter and narrower
the path is, which we now walk in, the lefg

Part hi. §. xlii. 155

reafon will any man have to look upon an
cxpofition grounded on it as erroneous, or
on his own dillruft of it as a piece of pru-
dent caution. No body has yet mifs'd his
way in it ; and, at the worft, a man can-
not while walking upon it, mifs, his way
far, I am indeed well afliired that the
maintainers both of the year-day and twen-
ty-four hour-day do not /pare me for calling
in queftion an opinion that is become quite
habitual to them. But we can do tiothwg a-
gainji the truth, but for the truth -^ which,
even in this affair, has already found recep-
tion with more people, than could have
been expedted. On the other fide, both
thefe parties cut out work enough for one
another, and one of them is ever driving
the other by turns on fuch in-commodious
confequences as the Middle Reckoning is
no way expofed to. We fhall fee too, who,
after this, will keep up his courage openly
and fteadily to efpoufe the Year-day or
twenty-four Hour-day, and charge the mid-
dle Reckoning widi untruth J altho' it comes
in for a (hare in every advantage that attends
either the Day of only twenty-four hours or

156 IMTROPUCTIPN*

that of a whole y^ar. However, if other
interpreters will needs abide by the one or
the other of thefe days -, let the reader at-
tend carefully whether they argue for them,
^nd upon what growids^ and whether they
can fatisfadtorily difprave ,all the evidence
for the Middle Reckonings or if they do not
rather chufe to pafs it -over in filence, which
is certainly a very tinfair ijoay. I hope fuch
a reader will perceive wher€ 'tis that he can
find fure footing, and leave that daflardly
objeftion, ' So ma7iy have e7^red that wejljall
^ ftever attain to the truth ^ to thoie who
mU think fo, right or wrong.
XLIII.
Now pofitiveiy^ what is a prophetical
Day ? Very lately Mr. Jacob Koch has with
great diligence enquired into the prophetical
reckoning of times, in his Expofition of Da-
7iiely in an Appendix to which he has, a-
mong other things, a fhojt Sy/lem of the
Apocalypje : where, with good reafon, he
cppofeth fometimes the Year-day, fometimes
the twenty-four Hour-day; but hoUs that
the prophetical Day is a commo?i Week^ p. ^j^
&c. p. 503, &:c. It will not be difagree^

Part iij. §. xliii. j^j

^ble either to this diligent inquirer or to o-
thers, that I exaniine this opinion a little.
In the calamitous periods of time mentioned
in the Revelation he reckons to one prophe-
tical Day feven common Days, and propor-
tionably to the Month, and Year or ()c^.i^o?)
Xairos,, Time. Indeed he proves that fome-
times the word Sabbath lignifies a Week : but
not that the word Day ever iignifies fev/:n
days. But his principal argument is this;
that diere is neither above the common year
nor below the common week, nor between
them, any other meaflire of time that will
make a prophetical Day. Not o-oer a year^
not under a week^ we allow ; for the reafons
given before in §. xxxviii, &c : but the
fame reafons prove, §. xl, that the true
length of a prophetical Day is^^r more than
a Weeky and therefore muft certainly be to
be found between the Year and the Week,
and that in a manner that fuch Days may
hold good in equal diftaiices after one another,
and in a ?na?nfold Summing^ according to
Mr. KGch\ fundamental populate.

Without doubt there lies fome where in
this very prophecy a Track which if we fol-

158 Introduction.

low we ihall find the length of the prophe-
tical Days and Months : and therefore we
enquire after the Months even before the
Days ; as the three Woes are for the moft
part comprifed in Months, and among thefe
the forty-two Months of the Beaft make
the moft confiderable ihew: we muft there-
fore confider alfo firft how many days pro-
perly go to fuch a month. The Track
juft mentioned may lie in the following re-
marks. The true meaning, for exam-
ple, of the faid forty-two Months, lies well
nigh in the middle, between them who
make either three and a half, or one thouf-
and two hundred and fixty common Years
of them : by, §. xlii. This middle, be-
tween three and a half, and one thoufand
two hundred and fixty, runs confiderably
beyond fix hundred ; viz, to fix hundred
thirty-one and three quarters : and a num-
ber confiderably more than fix hundred
comes already very near the Number of the
fame Beaft that follows in the text, to wit,
to the number 666. It is true even this
number too will be thought a very uncouth
one -y let us not however be ftartled at that,

Part hi. §. xliii. 159

but rather fince, ( i ), the Times of the
continuance oi" the three Woes do not them-
felves give us any handle for their more
particular Refolution, and (2) on the other
hand the Number of the Beaft is accom-
panied with a command to calculate, ac-
count or reckon, and alfo (3) every calcula-
tion requires at leaft two numbers 5 let us
only fee whether each of thefe two numbers,
to wit, the forty-two months and the 666
as the Number of the beaft, might not, un-
der the divine guidance, afford us that in-
difpenfable affiftance, of which no glimpfe
appears elfewhere, to fupply the very thing
that is wanting in the other. It is faid;
Here is the Wifdom : let him that hath under-
fianding count the Number &c. Now when
a hearty lover of the Revelation of Jesus
Christ thinks of thefe words, he will not
indeed attempt to break into the fandtuaiy,
through felf-confidence, but then neither
will he fhrink back under a pretence of
humility, but will be allured and excited
to follow, with refpedlful defire, as far as
at any time he finds before him an open
door and a clear path.

f6o In T R o D rr c T I o m.

Sa then I make the following remarks
with all pt)ffible plainnefs and perfpicuity.

L A Number is afcribed to the Beail,
and to hrs Name.

II. Whether, and how far, the Num-
ber of the Beafi: and the Number of his
Name are to be confidered as the fame, or
as different, is not yet needful to inquire.

III. It is enough at prefent that 666 is
the Number of the Beafl himfelf, which
Is here propefed, and indeed injoined, not
only to be numbj^ed or fold but to be reckoned
or calculated,

IV. That we may have a thorough
comprehenfion of a Number, two terms
are requifite, to wit, an AdjeSlhe and a
Subjia?7five ; for example, twelve Afojiles :
Here is twelve^ the {numerus mimerans^ or)
number numbring, and Apojlles, the (mime-
rits mmeratus^ or) number numbred. For a
while we may, to exprefs the Difference be-
tween them, call the former a cipher-mwi-
her^ and the latter ^fubje5l-72umbery iince it
is the name of that 'which is the fubjed of
the number.

Part hi. §. xliii. i6i

V. Where we have both thefe together,
there is no need of calculation.

VI. But where a Calculation is required,
as here; there is to be found out by that
calculation either a Cipher-number yet un-
known, fuitable and belonging to theSubjed:-
number given or already known -, for exam-
ple, when any one defigns a great building
he knows beforehand that a great mimier of
pounds will be required for the charge of it,
but how majiy hundreds or thoufands it will
take, he muft find out -, and this is called,
Luk. xiv. 28, i^\y\(p^li^y) to calculate;

VII. Or elfe, to the Cipher-number known
a fuitable Subjedl-number which is at yet
unknown, is to be found out.

VIII. Here is the Cipher ^number exprefs-
ly, 666 ; and fo that does not want to be
found out by calculation.

IX. CoNSEQjJENTLY, in this prophetical
enigma the Number of the Beaft is, as to
what relates to our calculation of it, a Sub-
jeB'tiumber,

X. And fo, to the Adjedlive 666 there
muft be found a Subftantive, that we may

i62 Introductiokt.

underftand whether it be 666 Provmcesy or
Men, or Heads, or Honis, or Crowns, or T^imes^
or Cubits, or P/V^r^'j of Money, or what elfe.

XL The Text itfelf demands an inquiry
after fuch a Subftantive -, for the number is
the number of a Man, or rather, a nwnher of
Man or human number.

XII. The meafure for the wall of the
new Jerufalem, viz, 1 44, is called a meafure
of a Man, iichich is that of an Angel, C. xxi.
17. On the contrary, the Number of the
Beaft viz, 666, is called fimply a 7iimber of
a Man or human Number, that is, in com-
mon ufe among men. Thefe two phrafes
are intelligible enough in themfelves : and
as they have an evident reference to one a-
nother, and explain and give more weight
to one another, they put into our hands the
Key of the prophetical Numbers. Eve7y
Expofition that pretends to do without this Kex^
is certainly wrong,

XIII. Now when the Number of the
Beaft is called the Number of a Man, it is
meant of a Subje^-^nnmhcr, not a cipher-
number. For 666, abftradledly confidered, is

Part hi. §. xlih. 1*3

neither more nor lefs than 666 : and 144 is
ftill 144, whether a Mafi or Angel tell them.

XIV. And fince the Subftantive, that
iuits the Adjedive 666, mull: be found out
by Calculation, that can be done only by
the help of another number in the text ex-
prefled in both its parts. No man can cal-
<:ulate with one number only, but mufl
have at leaft two : to be fure then we ihall
find another.

XV. We ought not to think of compar-
ing any one number with a?iy other, through-
out the book at a venture ; but two num-
bers belonging to the fame fubjex5l mull be
of one kind, or have fome certain relation
to one another. Therefore here in the affair
of the Beall, the Subftantive that is exprefled
in that other number, and the Subftantive
that is not exprefled along with 666, muft
be of one and the fame kind, viz, both of
them, as above-mentioned. Provinces^ or
T'imes^ or whatever it may turn out. If they
did not agree in this refpedt they would not
be of ufe, the one to refolve the other, by
means of calculation.

164 Introduction.

XVI. Suppose they fhould be 7/Wx.—
We may on the iirft hearing look upon that
as very fuitable : for ( i ) the word Number
is often ufed in fpeaking of Times : in mene^
mene (i. e. hath 7im7jbredj thy kingdom or
reign) it is meant of the 'Time of his reign.
(2) From the ninth chapter onward the pe-
riods of Time are frequently expreffed each
of them doubly^ as we have already obferved
§. XXVI, Num. iv. Therefore we fhall find
it fo likewije in this notable Nujj^ber of the
BeaJ}.

XVII. In all the defcriptlons of the Beafl:
no other numbers occur but the te?i Horns ^
the fe-ven Heads, and the forty-two Months.
If the Comparifon is made with the Horjis
and Heads the Beafl muft have 666 Parts
that belong in fome manner or other to his
Body 'y if with the forty-two Months, the
Number of the Beafl mufl yield 666 Times.
The former does not agree with the manner
of the exprefion. Number of the Beajl -, and
has no probability from the nature of the
thi?ig, fince no 666 paj-ts can be found to
be reckoned in the Beafl: ; which we fliall
find, C. xiii. i, to be ^ Power partly fpiritual,

Part hi. §. xliii. 165

partly temporal : there remains then only
the latter viz, the forty-two Months ^ which
alfo, as we faid near the beginning of this
§. XLIII, ftand in need of a folution, but
meet with it no where but here.

XVIII. And thus we may be bold to fay.
The forty-two Months are T'imes j therefore
the 666 2iX^T^imes alfo. The ten Horns are
all cotemporaiy about the latefl: time of the
Beaft, and fo belong not to this place : but
the feven Heads are one after the other ;
and indeed the duration of the five firft is
as long as that of the Power of the Be all: in
his forty-two months and his number : but
fince it is not faid how long each fingle
Head lafts, we muft find out the duration
of the Heads by tlie Times of the Beaft,
but not the Times of the Beaft by the Heads.
So it ftill comes to a Comparifon of the for-
ty-two Months and the Number of the Beaft.

XIX. These two Periods of Time do
not follow one another, in which cafe there
could be no comparing of them together by
Calculation ; but run on along with one
another, like the other above-mentioned
pairs or couples of periods. On this oc-

i66 Introduction.

cafion it is to be obferved that tho' in
thjE defcription of the Beaft the one Mark
of time is given in the Middle and the other
at the End, thefe two periods neverthelefs
run on together, even as the five Months
of the Locufts in the middle and in the
end of the defcription of them are one and
the fame.

XX. The 666 then are human Times, in
tommon ufe in life, as common Days, com-
mon Years, &c. On the contrary the forty-
two Months of the Beaft are not called hu-
man or common Months, one of which
contains about thirty common days : and we
have already Hiewn §. xl, that they zxc pro-
phetical Months.

XXI. The forty-two Months and the
Number 666 are tvfo equal periods of Times:
elfe we could have no fure ground for that
Calculation which is fo plainly commanded.
This Equality will be more fully iliewn in

§. XLVII.

XXII. Now calculate, reckon, perform
fome operation of arithmetick on the forty-
iwo Months and the Number 666. By
N'- XIX, we mull neither add nor fubftra<ft:

Part in- §. xliii. 167

much lefs will multiplication do. It remains
therefore that we muft divide. Dhide then
the greater Cipher-number 666 by the fmaller
42 ; and fo they will give each other the
neceffary folution above hoped for. The
Quotient is 15 -|t; of which we will at
prefent make ufe only of the integer or
whole number 15. Behold now,

42 Months are — 666, exaftly :

1 Month or 30 Days arc 1 5 of the 666, nearly :

2 Days are — i of the 666, nearly :

J Day is — — •? of an unit of 666, nearly.

XXIII. We have proved that the Num-
ber of the Beaft 666 is common Times: and
the common times are either Hours or Days,
or Months, or Years. Now the forty-two
Months of the Beaft are longer than com«
mon months 5 and the Number 666 is
not fliorter than the forty-two prophetical
months. Wherefore they cannot poffibly
be 666 common months, much lelsdays or
hours. In the Greek Original the number
^66 is either mafculine or, rather, neuter :
on the contrary the words for Hour and
Day are neither the one nor the other : the
word for Month is indeed mafculine ; but

i68 Introduction.

that word is already appropriated to the
forty-two prophetical months. So there re-
mains only the Tear, This word in the
Greek is both mafculine svtaulc?, and neuter,
fjof. The 7i€uter will obtain the preference
in §. XLV N°. XVIII and in §. liii : at pre-
fent let it be eithe?',

XXIV. Still then they are Years: as
Luther declares in his very valuable, but
ihort, and therefore little regarded, margi-
nal notes. The five firft Kings, with their
long duration in \htjirjl Being (fee C. xvii.
S.) of the Beaft, take up precifely thefe
666 years. That Ellipfis by which the
word Year is left out, we meet with in the
feventy Weeks of Daniel and pretty often
on other occafions : and the reader is tacitly
prepared for fuch an Ellipfis by the like de-
ficiency of the words Language d.ndHorfemen,
C. ix. II. 1 6.

XXV. Thus, about fifteen common Years
make one prophetical month or [about]
thirty days : and one prophetical Day is a-
bout half of a common year : or, to adhere
more clofely to the words of the text j^r/y-
two prophetical Months are 666 himan years.

Part hi. §. xliii. 169

Hereby not only the prophetical month and
day which we have been enquiring about^
from §. XXXVI 1 1, but belides that, the
Number of the Beaft too, is in a great mea-
fure difcovered. He that but now begins to
enquire after the proof of both, may read
over again what we have hitherto difcovered
at large 5 I know not how to help him any
other way.

XXVI. Tho' no man, in our times, lives
to 666 Years, yet this number is very aptly
called the Number of a Man or a number of
man or humaji number as it confifts of human
Years. For the attributes or predicates that
belong to a fpecies or to individuals are often
afcribed to the genus or to the colledlive
noun. People fay in dealing or in common
converfation, that corn, wine, cloth, wood,
&c. cofts fo much or fo much ; but every
body underftands it of the bufhel, the gal-
lon, the yard, the load or other particular
meafure. So a parcel of ants are faid Prov,
XXX. 25, and conies i;^r. 26, to be 'Si people
not ftrong and a feeble folk. The number
of fome hundreds of millions is afcribed to
X

170 Introduction.

the armies, yet is to be underftood of the
horfimen, C. ix. 16. Not only each thou-
fand, but every fingle follower of the Lamb,
has his name and the name of his Father
vmtten on his forehead, C. xiv. i. In a
liail-ftorm there are many ftones and each
ftone has it's own weighty yet C. xvi. 21, the
ImU itfelf is faid to be of the weight of a
talent. Likewife in the number of the beaft
there are 666 Years, and each year by itfelf
is a human year : yet the Number itfelf is
called human. The word Number is as it
were a fubftitute for another, for a while,
'till it be relieved or fucceeded by the word
Year ftepping into its place.

XXVII. Whoever makes as much ac-
count of the Vulgate as the Council of Trent
prefcribes, cannot get off; he muft under-
ftand the number 666 of Tears, For that
Tranflation from the earlieft times to the
prefent, has not fexce?ita &c. but fexce?2ti fex-
aginta fex in the mafculine, in conftrudlion
with which in latin we muft needs underftand
a fubftantive of the mafcuhne gender; and it
will be hard to find any other than anni^
years. If they fay there may be an error here

Part hi. §. xliii. 171

in the Vulgate; let them confider that if there
is it is nojlight one,

XXVIII. The "Time^ of the Beaft ftand
in contrail to the Meafures of the new J eru-
falem ; which is thus defcribed : aitd the
angel 7neafured the city with the reed^ 12000
furlongs \ (the lengthy and the breadth^ and the
height of it are equal) and he rneafuredthe wall
thereof 144, according to the meafure of a Man^
thatisy of an Angela C. xxi. 16, 17. On thefe
two paffages we fliall give the Expofition and
the Proof of it ; and here only take notice
in how many refpecfls they refemble one
another.

(i) There we find a Couple of Numbers^
viz. 12000 and 144: and here the like 42
and 666.

(2) There is an Ellipfs-, and here alfo:
for Reeds are underftood with the 144 (See
by all means, the Gnomon on C. xxi. 17)
and Tears with the 666.

(3) In both places it is notified of what
fort the Reeds and the Years are. Thofe

are angelick-human : thefe are merely hu-

^ Where this whole affair of the Meafures is briefly and
clearly explained.

172 Introduction,

man. Thofe were meafured by the angel
appearing in a human form: thefe were
reckoned according to human acceptation.

(4) There the 12000 furlongs are not
of the fame fort with the 144 angelick-human
reeds, but by virtue of the antithelis (or op-
pofition) only human or common furlongs :
for without fuch an antithefis 144 reeds would
bear no more proportion to 12000 furlongs
of the fame fort, than an inch to the height
of a fteeple. So alfo here the number 666
confifts of human or common times, and by
virtue of the oppofition the 42 months are
not human or common, but prophetical
months.

(5) There, there is a Meafure, and a
hikenefs: here, is a Calculation and confe-
quently, in numbers a Comparfon, The
12000 furlongs and the 144 reeds are entire-
ly equals the 42 months and the number
666 are alfo equal to one another.

(6) Ther E the 12000 were dhidedhy the
144: here the 666 by the 42.

(7) Th^Re an angelick-human reedc<?;/-
idifis mcii^ common furlongs and here a pro-
phetical month many common years.

Part hi. §. xliii. 173

(8) There is a reed of a quite iinufual
length : fo much the lefs occafion have We
to think it ftrange that the prophetical Day
Ihould likewife have a quite unufual length.

(9) In both paiTages we have reafon to
admire and rejoice for the delicate tempera-
ture of difficulty and eafinefs in the prophe-
tical enigma: fince in the number of the
Beaft and the meafuring the holy City each
couple of numbers, 42 and 666; 12000 and
144, is made partly difficult by reafon of the
unufual meaning of the word Mo7itb and the
Ellipjis of the words Tear and Reed-y partly
cafy, by means of the phrafes human and
angelick-human,

(10) Thus the Revelation^ C. xxi. agrees
with Ezekiel in this, that the holy city of
God, which is not confined within any
number of years (Tob, xiii. 18. Ecclus,xxxvn.
25) is architeBonically meafured-, and C. xiii.
with Daniel in this, that the calamities are
chronologically included in limited Times, And
thus we flick clofe to the text; whereas other
expofitors have laboured to explain the num-
bers either in both clKii^ers architectonically.

174 Introduction.

as Fr. Potter; or chronologically in both as

yob, Doelingius,

XLIV.
The Times of the Beaft are interwoven
with other periods of time that fall now in
our way. We have obferved §. xxxviii.
that the 'things and the Times, alternately
are ever driving one another clofer to the
point and opening or refolving one another.
The fame fervice the T'hi?igs by the?nfelves, and
fo alfo the I'imes by tkemfehes do to one ano-
ther. Now as the force of all the precedent
reafoning meets here in one point, there is
thus difcovered at the fame time a principal
ground of the Refolution of the Times and of
the Prophecy itfelf

I. The Tiines are chiefly the following ;
The angel mentions a Non-chronos
in his oath whereas the fouls under the
altar were directed to wait the length
of a Chronos. (See the Expofition of
C. vi. II.)

The Devil hath z JJjort time, '
The Woman fpends in the wilder-
nefs (partly parallel with the 1260

Part hi. §. xliv. 175

days, of which hereafter) a T^ime and
Ttimes and half 2. time &c.

All thefe Periods begin, one after ano-
ther, in the order in which they ftand in the
text; they go on along together in part of
their courfe ; and end fometimes foon after
one another, fometimes together.

II. The word T!ime (Kairos) has indif-
putably a particular and determinate fignifi-
cation, when it is faid, a T^ime and Times
and half a time; and fo like wife a ihort
T'ime. The cafe is the fame as to the

Chronos^ and as to the Non-chronos^ which is
fomewhat fliorter. For the Chronos has a
terminus a quo or determinate Beginning, viz,
at the anfwer given to the fouls under the
altar; and a terminus ad quern or determinate
End, reaching onward 'till their fellow-fer-
vants and brethren fliould be fullfilled. And
fince every waiting implies a time in an inde-
finite fenfe, the word Chronos would ftand
here to no purpofe, if it had not a certain
determinate fignification. In like manner
the No7i'chronos has a determinate Beginnings
VIZ, the time of the angel's oath, and a de-
terminate End, as it reacheth to the finifliing

1^6 Introduction,

of the myllery of God. Farther, the word
Chronos is not here to be underftood of Time
as oppofed to Eternity ; as if from the time of
that oath the world was not to laft a natural
hour, day, month or year longer: as the
oath is fworn fo long before the end of the
fecond wo, and before the trumpet of the
feventh angel which contains under it fo
many things and of fo long continuance.
Again, the word Chroms is not to be under-
ftood indefinitely and in a general fenfe^ of a
delay of an undeterminate length; for then
the meaning would be, that the time of the
oath and that of the finiihing were wholly
one and the fame, without the leaft diftance
between them: by which means this great
and folemn oath is reprefented as a very
trifling one. Confequently, the word Chro-
?ws too (as well as Kairos, Time) has here
2i fpecial and fingiilar meanings viz. of a period
of time of a determinate length, to which
the Non-chrcnoSy tho* no very fhort one, does
not reach. Nay more ; like as the oath in
Dan. xii. 7. concerns the time and times and
part of a time there mentioned and limited:
fo here alfo the oath properly relates to the

Part hi. §. xliv. 177

circumftance 'oftme^ a Non-chr 0710s : for the
^hmg itfelf, viz. the myjlery of God, was
abundantly declared long before to his fer-
vants the prophets.

III. Now what a Chronos may be we mufl
difcover ftep by ftep :

(i) TuE T'imCy times aiid half-time oi the
Woman are longer than the Number of the
Beaft: for they begin before the riiing of the
beafl out of the fea, and reach not only be-
yond the number 666 but quite beyond the
whole duration of the beaft, 'till the Dragon
himfelf, by reafon of his being bounds can
perfecute the woman no longer, C. xiii. 14.

(2) TuEjljoft time which the Devil hath
on the earth, is loiiger than the time, times
and half a time of the wom^n : for it ends
with them, but begins before them.

(3) The Non-chronos is higer than that
fame j(hort-time, and on account of it's length
is worthy of fo folemn an oath: for it com-
prehendeth in itfelf the third wo or fliort
time, and before that, the time from the
oath of the angel to the end of the fecond
wo, and thence to the trumpet of the feventh

Y

178 Introduction.

angel, nay on to the beginning of the third
wo. The folemnly fworn finifhing of the
myftery and words of God is firft connedled
with the iliort time which th^ Dragon has^
upon the earth, in C. x. 7. xvii. 17.

(4) The Chronos (C. vi. 11) is longer than
the Non-chronos; as the very name imports.
It begins before all the trumpets, and reaches
fo far as into the times of the beaft under
the feventh trumpet.

Tke proper length of a Chrojios will fhew
itfelf more exaftly hereafter: what is faid
of it now, concerns rather the length of the
No7i-chrcnos ; which on another account alfo
muft be of a confiderable length, viz. becaufe
the many Kings, beyond whom the prophe-
fylng with which St. John is here charged
i^xtends, run parallel with the Non-chroms.

IV. The Non-chronos has iefore it the
lirft wo, and the greater part of the fecond,
toward the end of which the impenitency of
men too preceeds the oath of the angel 3 and
the periods of time in the xx'*" chapter wholly
after it. And all thefe periods, following
one another, certainly comprehend fo large
a fpace that there is but very little of the time

Part iir. §. xliv. 179

from the date of the prophecy to the end of
the world, left between them.

V. From hence it plainly appears why,
not only in the title of this book but alfo in
the conclufion, it is faid, that in it were fhewn
the things that muft come to pafs with fpeed,
Th.^ greater part of the fpace from the dat€
of this prophecy to the end of the world is
taken up by thefe exprejjly hng periods 3 and
the fmalleft is quite filled up by thofe other
things that in general fhall come to pafs with
fpeed. On this occafion we may conceive
as if the whole book were one word, and fo
both the ipeed and the long periods were
j(poke out in one breath ; and therefore
Ihould rmtfet the general declaration oifpecd^
and the periods particularly expreifed as tak-
ing up much time^ in oppojition to one another
hit look upon them as two parts having a re-
ference to one another, and belonging to one
general declaration of time running thro' th^
whole book^ take and compare them; join
them and interweave them one with anotlier.
The times that are expr^fled evidently fpeak
for themfelves, and am£)unt to a great deal :
the reft paffes with fpeed : to which kind

j8o Introduction,

therefore belong particularly the trumpets of
the firft, fecond, third and fourth angels, no
time being determined for them. Thus the
Coming of the Lord (which is the Scope of
the whole book) and the time of it, is declared
partly by accelerations, partly by retardati-
ons; that i3 the true 'Term of it is, in an ele-
gantly varied way, fixed fiear^ but not too
near; far^ yet not too far off, viz. ;2^^rand
not too far, by the fpeed in general, by the
oath of the angel, as alfo through the inci^
dental difcovery of the long periods : far and
not too near, by the three woes and by va-
riety of periods of thofe and other things.

VI. Now by all this the Non-chronos,
has attained to a conliderable length ; where-
fore the word Non-chronos is to be taken in
a duly exteniive meaning, to fignify tantum
non Chronos, that is, not indeed a fidl ChromSy
but little fliort of it ; fmce a little time be-
fore, in the beginning or even the midft of
the fecond wo, (before the end of which
the angel fwore) it was, by virtue of the
cmtithefiSy a whole Chronos to the fulfilling
of the myftery of God : alfo on the other
hand tlie very name of Non-chronos and the

PaHT III. §. XLIV. i8i

oath of the angel, as well as the comparifon
of the calamities and the good things that
come after them, fliew that the former
fliould not laft too long, nor the latter be
too long delayed.

VII. Wherefore we muft alfo invert
what we advanced in N^ iii. and fay,

(i) The Chronos is iiot much longer than
the Non-chronos,

(2) The Non-chronos is not much longer
than the fliort Time.

(3) The jldort time is not much longer
than the time and times and half time.

(4) The T^ime and times and half time are
not ;nuch longer than the number of the bcaft.

Both thefe things (that of thefe periods
the one is always higcr than the other, and
that always the one is not much longer than
the other) is evident from the whole tenor
of the text.

VIII. Thus the Non-chronos and the
fhorter periods connected widi it are intend-
ed for a twofold declaration, to wit, that
men on earth might riot expedt the good
things either too eark or too late.

1 82 Introduction.

IX. That is : the Non-chronos provides
that men, when the end of the fecond wo
was drawing near, fhould not fkip too
quickly over the thirds nor exped the good
things that are to follow after it, too quick-
ly; much lefs look upon the plaufible ap-
pearance of the kingdom of the Beaft as the
joyful completion of the myftery of God.
The Non-chronos alfo provideth that men
ihould not quite give up their hopes : for
(i) the fecond wo endeth^c;^ after the oath
of the angel ^ (2) the third wo comes quick-
ly after the end of the fecond; and (3) in
the third wo the Dragon has but zjl:ort time.
For this very reafon, the times mentioned
between the time and half time muft be un-
derftood ftriftly oit^m times : and th&fjort
fimey which is longer than thefe i and 2
and ~ time, (i. e. 3 4- times) mufk be the
next above it, viz. four tifiies. Thus the
twofold declaration above-mentioned is part-
ly hidden and in part fufficiently plain.

X. Now we have found />r^//y nearly the
length in proportion to the number 666, of
thofe periods that are interwoven with it,

Part hi. §. xliv. 183

and alfo of the firft and fecond wo : but
we iliall foon find them out yet more nearly.
XL In the mean time, when we com-
pare together thefe very periods (only in this
length, as thus far fettled) with the fcope of
them taken notice of in N\ viii; the middle
reckcmng is yet more confirmed. For Firft,
by the twenty-four hours Day there is no pro-
portion between the 1000 years and the o~
ther periods, as the longeft of them would
come only to between 3 and 4 years : and
by the Tear-day they would extend a great
deal too far over and beyond the 1000 years.
Secondly, if one takes the periods longer
than we have hitherto made them out, and
reckons them by the Tear-day -, fuch an ex-
pofitor would find the fpace of time from
St. John's being in Patmos to the end of the
world too fhort for him, the difficulty ever
increafing, and the forty-two Months ex-
tended far beyond the length of the Non-
chronos and even the Chronos itfelf. If he
takes them jhorter and reckons them by the
common Day, things will then indeed come
to pzHsJhortly enough, with a pure and un-
allayed fpeed, not only thro' all the unde-

184 Introduction.

termined but through the determined times
alfo 'y efpecially when one interprets fo ma-
ny periods in the text all of them of the
3 f years of Antichrift only. But if they
are taken in that moderate middle length to
which they on the one hand confine^ and on
the other hand extend one another ; then in
the middle of the fpeed of the other things
thefc make a flop fo proportioned that all
the centuries, tho' fo many, are duly filled
up. Thus the complex of all the periods
do the whole ftrudlure of the prophecy an
important fervice, and fuch a one as no-
thing elfe does it, even fuch a one as the
aggregate or whole fett of the bones do to
the body : that the whole machine is ena-
bled to Hand handfomely ftreight and up-
right, fo that when cover'd all over with
veflels, fiefh and Ikin, yet it does not fink
down into a lump. Again, compare

• them with Hi/yory: hy xhQ twenty-four hours^
day it makes one or more empty-gaps of
many centuries 3 and by the Tear-day there
is a crouding of things together that is liable
to yet greater difficulties. But in the middle
way all the great revolutions as they tend to

Part hi. §. xliv. 185

one only mark, proceed on in an uninter-
rupted order and beautiful proportion ; and
the prophetical periods, C. vi — xiii. ferve to
a good purpofe, namely to point at and give
notice of the good things to come in a pro- '
per manner, 'till at laft the due time for
them comes.

This two-fold fcope of thefe periods like-
wife particularly eftablilhes the duration of
the three woes 5 which othcrwife one might
have taken according to the 24 hour-day
without running counter to our other pria-
cipal pofitions. For the forty-two months
of the Beaft are as long as the Number of
the Beaft -, nay not much ihorter than the
other periods num. vii: and of whatever
fort the months of the Beaft are, of the
fame fort arc the months of the locufts ,
and the hour and day and month and year
of the four angels let loofe upon the Eu-
phrates'', otherwife, as was obferved before,
there would be no proportion between the
three woes, and there would be no manag-
ing of them even in other points already
adjufted.

Z

i86 Introduction.

XII. The very T'itle of the book corrobo-
rates the middle reckoning : for it is called a
Revelation^ which implies a new grand dif-
covery. Now the things themfelves for
* the mofi part are contain'd before in the
prophecies of the old teftament, as particu-
larly the maintainers of the 24 hours-day
fuppofe, when they interpret almoft every
thing of the judgments upon antichriftianifm
and the peaceful times of the church that
follow thereupon : therefore this difcovefy
muft have for its principal fcope the T'imes,
by the manifeftation of which the Things
are put into fo regular a difpofition that any
one may know (and the nearer it draws the
more exadtly) about what time it is. Now
people have long enough fearch'd in vain
for fuch a thing on the footing of the year-
day y and by the 24 hoiirs-day they are fo
far from being able to find it, that a main-
tainer of that reckoning is not in a condition
fo much as to prove that the 1000 years in
C. XX. 2, fhall certainly begin within twelve,
feven or two centuries from this time for-
ward : by the middle reckoning alone there-
fore we can fet every thing in order.

Part hi. §, xlv. 187

XLV.

The true length of the prophetical Times
will be yet more nearly determined, and al-
io farther confirmed, by comparing the
1000 years in C. xx. (which, as will ap-
pear gradually but chiefly in §. liii, are to
be underftood in the proper or common ac-
ceptation) with the preceeding periods, fome
fhorter fome longer than it. For under the
trumpet of the feventh angel the various
preceeding calamities are compared, as op-
pofites, with the 1000 years in which Satan
is bound, and with the 1000 years in which
thofe of the firft refurredlion reign with
Christ. And as in this comparifon the
Things have a relation to one another, fo
we have alfo a glimpfe of a prGportion in
the times.

I. At the firft glance the number of the
•beafl and the 1000 years are to one another
very near in the proportion of 2 to 3 . And
this excites us to fee what may be the refult
of a more exac!^ calculation ; by which we
have, in the firft place this proportion.
2 : 3 : : 666 : 999.

i88 Introduction.

But as this falls a whole unit, or one
year, fhort of the looo years ; let us invert
it : and then it comes out by divifion

3: 2:: 1000: 666 J (4) or more
plainly in the expanded numbers

II. Here the quotient gives the number
666 again, and that in ^vVO v/ays, both in
the integer and the fradion. Nov7 alfo
we difcover fomething further to be calcu-
lated, befides the number 666 expreffed in
the text, which could not be feen yet in
§. XLiii above.

III. A Monad or Unit of 666 is i-fy^
year ; in like manner as the cubit in Ezek.
xl. 5, is a hand breadth longer than ufual.

IV. This may be one reafon among o--
thers why the word Tear is not expreflly
mentioned in the text; becaufe each monad
of the 666 is a few hours longer than the

folar^ or even xh^Jidereal year.

V. Nevertheless the number 666 re-
mains indifputably a human number in con-
tradiftindion to the much longer prophetical
year in C. ix. 15. For an unit of the 666
is more than 365 but lefs than 366 full

Part hi. §. xlv. 159

days 5 and many of the years in ufe among
men, i. e. the civil years of feveral nations,
differ farther than this from the exad: folar
year; but the fraction ~y or I amounts
to httle more than half a year on the whole
fum of 666. Thus they are and remain
human years, not angelick-human like the
144 meafuring-reeds in C. xxi. 17.

VI. Besides the 1000 years and the 42
months there is not in all the book a third
number that gives us the leaft handle or
pretence for comparing it with the number
of the beaft, and confequently for calculat-
ing that number : whereas each of thefe
two, efpecially both together, oblige us to
take the 666 for T^inies^ for human Tijnes^ in
a word, for Tears,

VII. At the fame time, this comparifon
of the two numbers 1000 (that is 999 y)
and 666 f leads us to fuch Secula or ages
as are fomewhat longer than the common
ones of 100 years, and therefore deferve our
particular notice. The thoufand years di-
vided, not into 10, but 9 equal parts, give
us fuch Secula^ each of which confiils of
1 1 1 f , and 9 of which, as mentioned above,

190 Introduction.

make up 1000 years, and 6 of them the
Number of the Beaft. The ancient Romans
approached very near to fuch ages, who
celebrated their fecular games^ not every
I GO, but every 1 1 o years ; and that in fuch
manner that they fell the 9'^ time on the
very 1000^*" year after the building of the
city of Ro7ne. So likewife did the old 'Etriifci
among whom one feculum with another
came to between 1 1 1 and 112 years. See
FoUtiaiu MifcelL C. 58, and Gyrald, lib, de
Anjih & Menfib. "T. 11. Op.f. 551 feg. This,
to be fure, as many other things befides,
they muft have received from the eajiern
nations.

VIII. The periods from the Chroma to
the Number of the Beaft are all of different,
but not greatly different, lengths (§. xliv.)
which are very precifely determin'd where
they are mentioned; for exanlple, the times
of the woman, which arc fo ftudiouily fplit
into I and 2 and f .

Now as the numbers 666 J and 999 f
(that is 1000) and in like manner, the i,
the 2, and the -\ in the times of the wo-
man, are fo proportioned to one another:

Part hi. §. xlv. 191

it will be well worth our v/hile to enquire
whether the proportion of the jufl-mention-
tdifecula or ages may not be a path to lead
us to the determinate length of all thefe
periods, and fuch a one as may not be to
be found any where elfe.

IX. From hence would arife the follow^
ing progreffion :

«• mi Years are - half a Time.

^' 222 y Years — i Time.

*=• 333 g^ Years — i i- Time.

•*• 444^ Years — 2 Times.

«• 5551- Years — half a Chronos.

*■• 666 1 Years — the Number of the Bead.

«• 777-^- Years — . a Time and (2) Times and half a Time.

*• 888 I Years — the ihort Time.

»• 999 I Years — the 1000 Years.

'■•^''«V"'*'"JtheNoH-chronos.

'• iiii -i- (that is, ^

1000 and 100 and > a Chronos.
I o and I i) Years 3

"»• 2222 I Years — an Aion or ^Evum.

as will appear more clearly as we proceed.

Of thefe periods, viz. from the half-time
up to the JEvum^ the one (as is plain from
the text) is always longer than the other in
the order in which they are placed here :
and the length here affigned to each of them

tg± Introduction.

has been nearly determined before from tlie
text : and now we may find the exa^ length
by means of the proportion.

TuEfiort time which the Devil hath up-
on the earth, and the time^ times and half a
fi?ne in which the Woman is obliged to flee
before him, are fet in contraid to the thoiifand
\ears in which Satan is bound ; as the num-
her of the beaft while he makes war -on the
faints, is to the thoufand years in which the
faints leign. Now as the number of the
beaft has a manifeft proportion to a thoufand
years : the fhort time and the time, times
and half a time will have the like. And a
Chronos^ the thoufand years^ the Jl:)orf time^
the time^ times and haf a time^ and the 7iufn--
her of the beaft are in proportion to one ano-
ther as lo, 9, 8, 7, 6. Thofe who require
yet more palpable proof will iind it hereafter
in our comparing of the Prophecy with Hif
toiy. In the mean time there opens to our
fight yet this other path to the truth, which
follows.

X. Mofes and the Pr^/Z^^^ bring in the Sep-
tenary, or number of 7, very frequently,
particularly in Days, from the creation on-

Part hi. §. xlv. 19-3

ward, and in after or latter times in Years :
but in the Revelation^ no number from i to
I o is lefs mentioned in exprefs terms than 7,
in the account of the times. But as it is full of
that number as to the things thcnifelves^ no
doubt wc iliall find it is fo in the T'imes alfo.
Now when an Expojition refolves the Periods
of Time in fuch a manner as plainly lays
open what is fo much hidden, viz. the Sep-
tenary 7iiunber both in Days and Years which
are exacflly meafured by the courfe of the
heavens, eftabliflied by the great Creator :
this may juftly be look't upon as a good to-
ken of it's being a right one. If the Ballance
of accounts between an Englifi and a Floren-
tine Merchant amounts to 7 Pounds Sterling,
the Italians Expreflion of that fum viz. 32
Piafters and 2 Lires, has no appearance of
a 7 in it, but in effect contains a 7, namely
of Englijh Pounds. Juft fo in the Revela-
tion the Number 7 is not expreflly mention'd
in the account of the ^iines: but as Days
and Tears are evidently meafured out to us,
one after another, by the courfe of the hea-
vensi fo they alfo plainly appear to us in the
A a

194 Introduction.

feptenary form by means of the true rejolntion
of the prophetical Eriigma in which they
were hidden.

XL In the juft mentioned progreffion the
hidden S>eptenary comes out plainly in Tears^
of the number marked ^ : and at "" and ^ fuch
Weeks of Years could eafily be iliewn : but
the Days are of more confequence in this
matter.

XII. Resolve, for Inftance, a Kairos or
Time, that is 2 22 1- Years, into Days,
They make (according to the common way
of reckoning 365 Days, 5 Hours, 49 Mi-
nutes to a Year," without regarding the Se-
conds) 1 1595 Weeks all but 44 |- minutes.
Thefe 44 -f minutes need not difturb any
body, as they don't amount to a whole Day
in upwards of 7000 Years, and fo make no
alteration, through the whole progreffion,
in the number of the Duys into which the pe-
riods are refolved.

" But reckoning alfo the odd 1 2 feconds (which really be-
long to the year, as appears from the following N°' XIV. and
XV.) there will be no deficiency; the 222 |- years multiplied
by 1 2 amounting to 2666 -| feconds, that is, 44 minutes and
f precifely. Compare with N^- XIV. and XV. the Author's
OrdoTcmporum, page 322 and 438.

Part hi. §. xlv. 195

XIII. Thus we have a Septenary of Days
in the Years marked ^ ^* ^ ''» ^> and fo on,
with fufficient exadtnefs.

XIV. But as the opinions of the moft ac-
curate Aflronomers concerning the true
length of the Year are different as to the Se-
conds : it is worth our confideration whether
in the number of the Beaft, for Example,
which by the common reckoning comes to
34785 Weeks, wanting 2 Hours 13 f Mi-
nutes, and fo contains indifputably a Septe-
nary of Days, thefe fame 2 Hours 13 ^ Mi-
nutes ought not to be added to them, for the
fake of the Septenary \ and fo proportionally
in the whole Progreffion.

XV. At this rate the true Length of a
Year is 365 Days 5 Hours 49 Minutes and
12 Seconds, or to exprefs it more briefly
365 -^Vs- Days: and fo out of 400 'Julian
Years juft three Days muft be deducted (to
make them equal to the fam.e number of fo-
lar Years) as the Gregorian or new Style di-
rects. For, by reafon of the fraction -^VV,
400 folar Years muft pafs before the odd
Hours, Minutes and Seconds, come out in-

1 9"6 In»T R O D U C T I O N.

to whole Days: and at the fame Time they
come to whole Weeks, There are in 1 3 3 y
Jiilia72 years 48700 Days, but in as many
Iblar years only 48699, and confequently
6957 Weeks. Hence this progreffion, 133 f ,
266 J, 400, 533 f, 666 T, 800, &c. is to
be refolved exadlly into precife Weeks, and
contains in it a ?^oimd and convenient Cycle ^
ivorfky of our attentive confideration.

This length of the Year is a Medium be-
tween the Opinions drawn from the moft
accurate Obfervations of antient and modern
Aftronomers in the eaft and wxft; nor does
it any way difagree with the exad:ej[l obfer-
vations that have been made by excellent
mathematicians : and thus, "what human ac-
curacy has not hitherto been able to fettle^ is de-
termined out ofthefcriptures.

If Mathematicians religioufly difpofed,
would, oiit of a regard for the prophetical
Word, flirther examine this length of the
year and eftablifh it, it might hereafter give
a handle for determining the true, but yet
more hidden length of the natural or fyao-
dical Month, ;^nd for other fuch like difco-

Part hi. §. xlv. 197

veries : for in this cafe too we may fay.
Here is the wifdo?n,

XVI. Thus in our progreflion "' '' ^ ^» ^
yield exadly half-weeks, and ^ '» ^^ ^ ^> "'^
exadt weeks : and this goes on, taking the
now-mentioned length of the year, in iiifini-
tum^ without the defe6l or excefs of one
hour, minute, fecond, &c.

XVIL The antient philofophers have
given various Appellations to the digit num-
bers from I to 10 : that of the number y^iw/
is (v.xi^o(;^ Kairos, Time. See Franc ,P atricij
Difaifs, Peripat f, i^og.

The reafons they had for giving thefe
Names we fliall not enquire after : but here
as a Time or Kairos confifts of precife weeks,
and is the root of all periods confifting of
pure weeks, it is a very lingular Coincidence.

XVIII. Many underftand a Kairos to be
the fame as z prophetical Tear, And indeed
they are not '-oery widely different: for the
prophetical year is 190 4- r common years,
and the Kairos or Time 222 -f fuch years."^

** They are in proportion to one another as 6 to 7, viz.

3 600^0 «-f« +2 coo

.198 Introduction,

But the prophetical year is in this book ex-
preffed by it's own proper word (ewciulo,-)
Eniautos: and Kairos never fignifies a year.
The prophetical year is too fhort in this cafe;
for I and 2 and f Times is longer, but i
and 2 and f prophetical years are of the
fame length as 42 months or the number of
the Beaft. Juft ioCh7^o?ios in the modernGreek
language fometimes fignifies a year: butin/foi
Prophecy Chrcnos fignifies a great deal more
than a prophetical year : even as much as
fever al Kairoi or Times. Both thefe words
have a general fignification and fo may mean
a Year or any other fpace of time, like' the
Chaldaic word (t*'>') Odm^ Dan, vii. 25:
but in the Revelation the particular meaning
is determined only by comparing of texts ^
and by that method a Chronos appears to be
equal to free Kairoi,

XIX. Some may think with themfelves
what reafon there can be why 222 f fiiould
be the frjl number in the progrefiion that is
regarded as a "whole Kairos, and the proceed-
ing one 1 1 1 ^ only as half a Kairos : whereas
in common ufage 100 years, the firft fi:ep,
is a whole Jeci/lum or age : and 777 |- years

Part hi. §. xlv. igg

(they may think) might as well have been,
called 2 and 4 and i times of 1 1 1 -^ years,
each, as i and 2 and f times of 222 y years
apiece. Now here we have the proper
Reafon: for, as many whole weeks as there
are in a Katros, fo many half weeks there
are in a halfKairos, which when divided by
7 has always a remainder of 3 4- odd Days.
So, the 777 I- being reckoned but 3 f not
jKairots the 888 y years are very fitly called
a (hort time, or rather a ""few tijnes^ as they
do not exceed 7, but amount only to 4
Kairoi,

XX. The progrefiion carried farther on
gives the true age of the Worlds with it's hif-
torical and prophetical periods, in fuch a con-
catenation as wonderfully confirms the truth
of the whole holy Scripture of the old and
new teftament, particularly the Apocalypfe,
and lays open the admirably beautiful divine
oeconomy recorded in them. This is what
is intended in that important expreflion,

^ The principal and proper figniiication of the original word
•Xiyo? is few in number. It is indeed ufed alfo for little in
bulk or dimenfions, 5fC. but then it is (as in Lexic. Bafileenfe)

(iKiyai; prO fCix^o;, Ut fit 7rQaolr,<; uvli TrrjXtXoT/jTO-:,

200 Introduction.

Here is the Wisdom. This wifdom does
not confift merely in knowing the number
of the wretched beaft (which is indeed need-
ful to be known for a few years, but after the
deftruffion of the beaft will be forgotten as
an old thing) but in our apprehending the
comparifon of the prophetical numbers as the
true Key in our Meditations on the divine ad-
miniftration through all ages of the world.
The periods of time prediBed in the Revela-
tion are always fo framed that they muft be
added to thofe periods that were/^ from the
Creation to the date of this Prophecy. Either
fett of times, thofe before and thofe after St.
John's being in Patmos, taken feparately is
an uncompleat thing : but they refer to one
another and ought to be brought into one
fum. This is the main defign of fo numerous
difcoveries of times in the Revelation : and
and this being well weighed will guard thofe,
who in this Book coniider the times as well
as other things, from all imputation of vain
curiofity, will affure them of the importance
of fuch a difquifition; and fupport their hopes
of attaining to the truth. But the proper

Part iti. §. xlv, xlvi. ^dj
place to treat of this is in the ^ Ordo Temporum;
where a fober anfwer will be given to thofe
who cavil and tell us that, to be fure, we
fliall come at laft not to be fatisfied without
knowing that Day and Hour, Matt. xxiv. 36.
On the other hand, thus much is already
plain from what we have now learned out
of the Revelation, that we are able to refolve
the prophetical Times now aftually in courfe,
particularly thofe of the Beaft, more eafily
than fome v/ould think who are otherwife
ingenious perfons; even fuppofing there was
no finding out the exa*5l number of the pail
years of the world, to fay nothing of thofe
that are yet to come.

XLVI.

Above, after dividing 666 by 42 the
Quotient being 15 44 h we let alone the
FraBion-, in the mean time We have got
another FraBion belonging to the number
666, viz. 114 V- Now if this latter were
alfo refolved, the better would it and the
former anfwer ojie to another^ whereby the
Bb

y Ordo Temporum was publiflied the next Year after thi?,
viz. A° T741,

202 Introduction.

length of the 42 Months and fome other

prophetical periods might be more exadly

adjufled.

XLVII.

In every Enquiry, and particularly in the

prophetical Chronology^ one may oblerve one

defedt after another both in himfelf and

others, and always come nearer the mark,

but alfo ftill fall a little fhort of it, and yet

know that he is come nearer it. This was

my own cafe for fome time with regard to

the periods which pafs before the number of

the Beaft; but now with regard to the refo-

lution of thefe we find a more convenient

handle, fmce the perfedl equality of the 42

Months of the Beaft and the number of the

Beaft; taken notice before in §. xliii. N°.

XXI. is farther confirmed by the following-

arguments.

I. Other Periods are entirely equal. In
the firft wo, the 5 months arc twice men-
tioned in the fame terms 3 whereby the rea-
der is prepared for the like equality of the
periods afterwards expreffed in two different
manners. In the fecond wo, the fpace of
the hour and the day, and the month, and

Part hi. §. xlvii. 20^

the year was, as it were, adequately filled
lip by the 400 millions of Horfemen. The
cafe is the fame in C. x. of the Non-chronos
and the many Kings. In the xx'^ Chap-
ter, the 1000 years are feveral times repeat-
ed ; as the five months in the firft wo. And
in C. xxi. the numbers 12000 and 144 will
be found to be of the fame magnitude.

IL The 42 Months cannot be longer than
the number of the Beaft,. for his power, li-
mited to the 42 Months, cannot fubfift with-
out his Being or Exiftcnce, which is includ-
ed in his number. There is, befides, in the
foregoing Progrefiion, no fuitable number
between JTJ ^^ and 666 ^ to anfwer to the
42 Months. Again the number of theBeaft
cannot be longer than the 42 Months. For
the 42 Months, ftand in the beginning of
the defcription of the Beaft, before the
Number 666 : fo the Number cannot be-
gin before them. Neither can the fame
Number reach beyond the 42 Months, fince
the moft violent exercife of his Power,
wiiich is limited to 42 Months, is toward
the end of his number, C. xiii. 17. The
very Name of Beast denotes a Power :

204 Introduction.

for which reafon it is faid of him afterward,
when his number is run out, his kingdom
darkned and his power broken. The Beast
u not.

Both periods then are of equal length:
and as the power of the Locufts and the
Power of the Horfes lafted as long as the
Locufts themfelves in the firft wo, and the
Horfes themfelves in the fecond wo^ fo the
Power of the Beaft in the third wo, lafts
as long as the Beaft himfelf in hiis number.

III. Now as no reafon can be offered
why we fhould rejedl this equality of thefe
two periods ; 'tis therefore our fureft way to
adhere to it, as the following proportion
and its confequences will farther confirm us :

42 : 6663 : : i : I5lf.
The thing can never be fettled any other
way ; but by this it can, with certainty, and
beyond our hopes ; for tho' the two Frac--
iions might to many people appear ftrange
enough : yet when, in the real prophetical
periods of time, they produce, by this very
proportion, round and proportionable whole
mimbersy they will without doubt give fatis-

Part III. §. xlvii, xlviii. 205

fadion to all, efpecially thofe who are ikil-
ful in the knowledge of Numbers.

IV. By virtue of the equality of thefe
two periods, in a progrefTion of months by
/evens, there are

in 7 prophetical Months 1 1 1 | common Years.
14 2 fevens, 222 -I

21

•3

333 H

28

4

444 f

35

5

555 i

42

6

666 1 1

49

7

777 -^

56

8

888 1-

63

9

1000 (999 .;o

70

10

I n I i and fo oh.

In this progreflion, the exprefs Septena-
ries of the prophetical Months, and the half
and whole weeks of Days, into which the
common Years are refolved in the manner
we have mentioned above, agreeably co-
incide.

XLVIII.

Thus 42 prophetical Months are precifely
666 V common years : and now by means
of thefe Months we can come at the Year
and Day and Hour in the fecond wo ; as
alfo the 1260 Z)^v5 of the Woman which
berin between the fecond and third wo ;

2o6 Introduction.

the determination whereof is very important,
fmce there areyi inany Days.

Now it may be alked, I. Whether the
prophetical Month is to be divided into pro-
phetical Days according to the proportion of
30 days to a common month, which would
make a year of 360 days ? or whether that
divifion muft not be made in proportion to a
fhorter or longer common month, confifting
of fome hours lefs or more than 30 days; in
both which cafes, efpecially the latter, the
year retains it's natural length of full 365
days ? The anfwer is : the months of 30
days had been long before difufed; and fhort-
er months had indeed been in common ufe,
efpecially among the Jews: but in Afia in
St. Johri^ time, longer months were in ufe,
and had been for a long time, as Archbifliop
Ufher proves at large in his Israel ^ de Maced.
£5? Jfianorum Anno Solari, And fmce in C.
xi. 2, (as will appear in the Expofition) we
m.eet with this longer fort of months and no
other (and fo, it is all one here whether they
be common or prophetical months); we
adhere to a conformity with them, A montli
of 30 days, or even a fliorter, would not in-

Part hi. §. xlviii. 207

deed lead us into any wide miflakes : but
after much labour things will not come out
quite right, as experience has taught me;
^nd ^2 continued months, of 30 days each,
without intercalation of the days requifite
for 3 T years, are no where to be met with.
Even the Chaldeans long before DaniePs
time reckoned, not 360 but 365 days to a
year. So a longer month, which is an ali-
quot part oi 2i year, C. ix. 15. and indeed a
twelfth part (compare C. xxii. 2) and fo
confifts oi not lefs, nay more than 30 days,
is quite commodious and eafy. Now 42
fuch months come to 3 f years; yet it is
proper that that fpace of time fhould be
called 42 months, and not 3 f years ; for
the word Tear was to be underftood foon af-
ter in the number of the Beaft ; fo it would
not have been convenient to be ufed here
too; and befides, this jiuinber is more eafily
divided by 42, the number of the months.
Hereby alfo the third wo gains a more ma-
nifeft refemblance to the two preceeding
ones, of which the fecond, befides it's hour
and day and year, has it's month too, and
the firft has months only, and thefe not

2o8 Introduction.

amounting all together to half a year. And
the 42 months are capable of being varioufly
divided (not only from the nature of the
Number, but alfo in \:omparifon with the
number 666) into feveral periods, which co-
incide with hiftorical fadls.

It may be alked, II. Whether the 1260
days of the Woman are natural or propheti-
cal days? I anfwer. They are prophetical^
For ( I ) a confiderable part of them paffes
before the times of the Beaft, before the
End of which the times are all figuratively
expreffed. (2) 1260 common days would
bear no proportion to the 3 f times in which,
it is faid foon after, the Woman was to be
maintained in the wildernefs, and which are
of a confiderable lengthy (3) the things
which come to pafs in thefe 1260 days re-
quire a longer time. However, this pe-.
riod of 1260 days is fhorter than the 3 f
times : for the 3 4- tin^^s are longer than the
number of the Beaft, and confequently
lono-er than the 42 jnondis of the Beaft, and
thefe amount to full J 278 prophetical days.
The 3 t times come to more, and the 1260
days to kfs than 666 ; years. The lo7igeJ{

Part hi. §. xlviii, xlix. 209
of thefe periods is expreffed in Kai7^oi or
Times, the middle one in Months and the
Jljortejl in Days,

Bleffed be the name ^ God for ever and
ever : for wifdo?n and might are his. And
He changeth the times and the feafons. He
removeth kijigs^ and fetteth up kingSy He giv-
eth the wife their loifdom^ and to men of under-
Jlanding their knowledge^ He revealeth ths
thijigs that are deep and fecret^ He knoweth
what lieth in Darknefs -, and Light dwelleth
with Him, Dan. ii. 20 — 22.

XLIX.

It is univerfallyunderftood that 1 2 months
make a year. Now a year confills of
"" 365 -//t- days. A day, in contradiftinc-
tion to night, contains 12 hours, particularly
at the Equinoxes: but where it is put in
contradiftindlion to the year, to the month,
and to the hour itfelf, C. ix. 1 5, it is divided
into 24 hours. And in this proportion
comes out the proper length of the fo often
mentioned prophetical periods, without far-
ther trouble.

Co

^ Or, in Decimals, 365. 2425 days.

2IO Introduction.

Forty-two months in the common or
prophetical fenfe are equally 3 - years, or
1278 ^i-l days : and the 42 months in the
third wo are 666 -;- common years, or
243495 common days; and confequently

prophetical natural days

the 1260 days of the woman, are 240000

precifely, or 657
years and 46 days,
the hour, day, month,
and year in the 2"*^

wo, - - are "J^^i^^ [/. e, 10795

weeks] and not full
22 hours; or 207
years abating 40
days,
the 5 months in the

i'' wo, - - are 28987 i [/. e. 4141

weeks and 12 hours]

or 79 f years full.

L.

All thefe periods are compofed of feveral

months, of feveral days, of an hour and a

day and a month and a year ; yet in the

now mentioned natural days into which they

Part hi. §. l, lt, lit. 211

are refolved there appears plainly either a
round OY \hc feptcjtary number; for which
reafon we have been more exad: in reckon-
ing thefe Days than would otherwife have
been ncceffary. In the firft and fecond w^o
there are feme odd hours over the weeks.
The 1260 days of the Woman are 180
prophetical weeks y and the number of the
natural days is vifibly a round one.

LI.

By means of this refolution of times,
that which we touch'd upon out of hiftory
in §. XXXII. is more exadly limited and
determined : but the producing hiftorical
particulars belongs to the Exposition of the
text; and thereby will this our Resolution
OF Times, (like a fkeleton covered with
•fleih and Ikin) acquire the proper form of
an animated body.

LII.

Thus have we determined the periods
which we find in the text, without ever
once concerning ourfelves w^hat might be
the proper length of one finglc prophetical
day, or month, or hour, or year itfelf.
And indeed fuch an enquiry is no way ne-

212 Introduction.

ceflary for our purpofe; as no one of thefe

fingle times ftand alone in the text.

In §. xLiii. we have thus far difcovered
the prophetical Month and Day^ that the
former i^hetwee?! 15 and 16 common years,
and the latter about half a common year.
Before I had obferved that important pro-
portion of the number 666 to the 1000 years,
the length of that hajf-year which anfwers
to a prophetical day could not be precifely
determined. Hence it was that the ^ Pl an?
p. 26, — 45, has adjulled matters no other-
wife than upon the footing of a half of a
common year; but yet even in that way (by
virtue of what is mentioned in the Plan it-
felf§. XXII, and now in this Introduction
§. xxxviii — XLii) no very wide miftake
could be made. Now therefore it is to be
hoped that this yet nearer determination of
the prophetical day and of what depends
upon it will be yet more welcome : efpecially
as it is now fully fettled, and here it fhall
reft. A Half-year, Semcjlre^ or ^ Six^

* See Preface §. iv.

*» A Six-month will not feem a very ftrange Expreflion to
any one that refiefts on our common ufage of calling a Year a
fivehe-mcnth, and faying a couple of Twelve-months, ^c.

Part hi. §. lii. 213

month, ^x?i6i\y or nearly, is, in fome mesi-
fure, an entire or whole, and indeed no jn-
confiderable period of time; not indeed in
every language, but however in that of A-
ftronomy, the civil Law, and even in com-
mon Life, ' and alfo among the Hebrews
whofe new year began in the autumn, but
their firil month was in the fpring, &c.
Theodorit in. his Commentary on Dan. iv.
13, interprets the feven Times of fo many
Winters or Summers, that is fcy^n Semejiria
or feven Six-months ; and refers to other in-
terpreters. Thomas Parker in Comment,
Dan. expounds the 2300 days (or evening-
mornings), C. viii. 14, offo many half] or
1 1 50 whole years. In a word feveral na-
tions in Afia, Europe and Afiica, near to
and in the midft of whom Fatnm lies, an-
tiently reckoned every Six-?no72th a Tear,
Thefe things however are adduced here,
only to fhew that it is no fuch abfurd thing
or remote from the common notions of men
to reckon half a year, 7iearly\ to be the pro-
phetical day: which therefore may ftill very
aptly be called a Sejneftre or S.ix-?no?ith, tho*
it i§ not precifely fix months ; for the num-

214 Introduction.

ber of the days in the two fix-month years
of the Hebrews, and even thofe of the hea-
vens from one equinox to the other, are not
equal, it is fenough that the prophetical day,
is not a common day^ nor a whole year^ nay
neither 5 nor 7 but 6 months. Whofoever
can think of a more commodious name, is
at liberty to ufe it.

However, now at laft, after the refolving
of the entire periods is is very eafy to find the
Jingle times : but whatever appearance they
mav make as to round or odd, &c. numbers,
we need not to take offence or make that
any objedlion 5 fince, as was before obferved,
no one of them ftands alone in the text.
prophetical: common Times.

I Hour - is 7 I? days.

I Day - is t year and near 8 days 5 or
190 v° days.

1 Month- is 15 I f years; or 5797 ^ days,

I Year - is 190 ff years; or 69570
days precifely.

Here there appears no feptenary number
in the common days in a prophetical hour,
day, month, or year ; but rather fradlions.
But then it is fo maich the more worthy of

Part hi. §. lii. 215

our notice that in the progreffion as foon as
the prophetical times arife to the half or the
whole of the Septenaries, the common times
(both thefe we meet with in the text, and
in higher fteps of the progreffion) coincide
with them in round numbers.

Common

Prophetical

Hours, Days,
Years -

Months or ; i

make

C Hours, Days, Monthj
\ Years.

190

I O"

2 r

I.

380

z 2.

2 z

2.

571

A -1

3-

666

2

T

3 i or half 7.

1333

I
T

7-

2666

z
V

14.

4000

precifely

21.

and fo on.

Particularly the fradional number
666 Y falls once more in our way; and
therefore we will here bring together all the
places in which it has hitherto occurred to us.

A HALF of a prophetical week, whether
3 i years, months, days, &c. makes always
666 *- common years, months, days, &c;
by this §. Lii.

2i6 Introduction.-

TriREE Kairoiy or 6half-kairoi, or 42 pro--
phetical months, make alfo 3 f prophetical
years or 666 \ common years ; §. xlvii.

Five cycles of 133 '^ which contain
each a precife number of natural days, make
alfo 666 * common years: §. xlv. N°* xv. •

Below, on C. xxi. 17, we fhall fee that
8 Calami or angelic -human reeds make
666 3 common furlongs. So, there the
number of the Beaft happens to fall in with
the meafure of the new Jerufalem ^ tho'
by very different fleps of the progreffions.
On this occaiion one may alfo confider that
fraBion which is mentioned in the laft note
on C. xiii. 18.

LIIL

This middle isoay of reckoning of time
feveral people cry, is very ftrange indeed ;
and the decifions founded upon it are too
variegated, interwoven and intangled in one
another. This is indeed only mitradiBing
not objeBing, He that has nothing but this
to alledge denies the conclufion, but does
jiot argue againfl: it. Many things that look
plaufible to us are not, for that reafon, true;
and many things are really true that yet are

Part in. §. lii. 2ijf

not (o plaufible. Thus we often find it in
natural things j how much more may we
exped: it in thofe things that depend wholly
on divine Revelation and Teftimony! There
we fhould hearken, not to our own under-
ftanding but to the word of God. Let
them fliew wherein the proofs are deficient
on which this fo parodoxical refolution of
the times is eftablifhed. We will here fum-
marily repeat the principal points for that
purpofe.

In the three woes a common day is much
toojhort for a prophetical day^ and a whole
year much too long. But what may be the
proper length, between thefe two extremes,
of a prophetical day, and that particularly
with regard to the 42 months of the Beaft,
cannot poffibly be difcovered any other way
than by that calculation, enjoined us on oc-
cafion of the number of the Beaft; and again
this calculation muft indifpenfably be per-
form'd by taking to us the aiTiftance of the
42 months of the fame Beaft. We follow
the direftion in the text, we calculate, we
find, without the leaft wrefting or ftrainin^,

D d

2i8 Introduction.

the prophetical times proceeding on regularly
in the middle-Way between the afore-men-
tioned extremes ; and as the number of the
Beaft comes out entirely equal to the 42
months of the fame Beaft, fo it is in propor-
tion to the following 1000 years as 2 to 3.
Befides all this, there prefent themfelves
to our view the moft beautiful proportions
both as to the feptenary number and in other
refpecfls. Laftly, in the completion of the
prophecy the hiftorical fadls agree with our.
fcheme fatisfadtorily. This is the whole
of the matter: the will or wit of man makes
it neither more or lefs. If any man looks,
miftruftfully on this fame elegancy of pro-
portions, and on the other hand, can fee
nothing of a demonftration ; let him think
again whether the fault may not lie in his
own eyes. No other calculation can be fo
natural and unconftrained ; only we are not
yet enough accuftomed to this middle way >
tho' feveral both antient and modern expofi-
tors have fearched after fuch a way, fome in
refpeft of this, fome of that point 3 for the
natural times are to the prophetical of the
fame denomination ' ^

Part hi. §. lii. 219

as I to I to thofe that take all the words
fignifying times in the common
acceptation,
as I to 365 i- to the maintainers of the year-
day.

They are alfo reckoned

as I to 7 by Joh. Woltherus in his
Golden Ark, p. 124, 125;
where he takes 1260 days of
the Witneffes for fo many
weeks ^ &c.

as I to 12 in the treatife called '^ Glaiihe
und Gedult^ p. 156 s where
the 5 and the 42 months of
the Locufts and of the Beaft
are propofed as fo many j^^zrj,

as I to 30 by Lud. ab Alcafar who is
inclined to expound the 3 f
days of the Witneffes by fo
many nionths,

as I to 334 with regard to the time of our
Saviour'sconverfation on earth,
by Joh. Dcclingius de Antichr,
prof, C. II.

as I to 50 by Chunmannus Flinfpachius.

f i. e. Faith and Patience.

220 Introduction.

as I to 84 by John Fox, who holds I

month for fe^n years, and fo

42 months for 294 years,
as I to 100 ty Juftin Martyr, taking the

3 i times for 3 50 years, &c.
as I to 120 by L. F. Gans, the noble Lord

ofPutlitz.
* * *

as I to 235 by John Hufs, Paul Afphe,

and again by Dcelingius; who

take a month to be a cycle of

19 years.

Our Expofition comes in the middle

(viz. at the place mark'd with aftericks) of

thefe opinions, each of them the refult of a

fearch after a middle way^, and that in fuch

* From thefe diiTerent Opinions it appears that thinking
nien. in all ages have feen the nccejjity of finding out a midMe
length of a prophetical day between a common day and a year ;
but have only gucjfed at it from an imagined equality betu^een
it and fome period of common t'nne, as a week, a month, &c.
prfome other remarkable period, as that of our Saviour's life-
time. Whence we may learn the value of our Author's dif-
covery, whoh^^ fettled xhQ proper length of it on fure grounds
found in the text itfelf, fo that hiftory coincides furprifmgly
with his Expofition, of which the knowledge of //^^ true length
9/ the prophetical periods is a main pillar and fupport

Part hi. §. lii. 221

a manner that it carries on all the propheti-
cal periods in one conne(fted demonftration.
Here the proportion of the hour, the day,
the month, and the year ought in reafon to
make every thing eafy and fmooth to us.
The Romans divided their As into 1 2 parts j
and according to that proportion ufed the
denominations of Semijfes^ Dodrantes^ &c.
in their taxes^ in their iitheritanceSy Sec, In
Hebrew, the analogy or proportion makes
iovcit Accents be called Emperors, fome Kings,
Dukes, &c. In the great Image, Dan, ii.
all the parts from the head to the toes on the
feet, come out by virtue of the proportion.
And fo it is alfo as to the hours of the day
and the watches of the night in the para-
bles in Matt, xx. i, &c. Mark xiii. 35.
Neither is it neceflary that the prophetical
day ihould, according to the courfe of the
heavens, yield on divifion exadlly a round
period of 24 natural hours, or by multipli-
cation, 365 days full; vA\tn fun-inonths and
hours, without regard to the courfe of the
heavens, are fo commonly ufed and under-
ftood. Therefore all times that are in pro^

222 Introduction.

portion to one another as i to tV? 3°) 3^5 *
&c. may be called a day, an hour, a month,
and a year; let the prophetical day (which
is the monad, unit or root) be a common
year, or a quarter, or any thing whatfoever.
But how commodious the day of nearly half
a year is, is fhewn above -, and why fhould
not this be allowed, when the word Calainus
or Reedy C. xxi. 15. is ufed in fo uncomm.on
a iignification? but let him who ftill does
not know what to make of fuch a prophetical
day, either anfwer the arguments for it in
§. XXXVIII, or §. XL; or elfe let him content
himfelf with making the moft profitable ufe
he can of the other parts of our meditations.
But befides, let this be ever fo varioufly in-
terwoven or ravel'd a computation; yet it
/imply follows the text, which is itfelf fo va-
rioufly interwoven. And how comes there

« /. e. In round numbers or in the common way of reckon-
ing : which is fufficient to illuftrate, by an example, what is
here faid oi proportion : for in calculating the prophetical times
and reducing them to common times the author reckons to a
month the precifc 1 2*** part of a year, viz. 30 days and almoft
\y his day is the 365 -^-^s part of a year, which is the fame
as a natural day ; and his hour is the 24^'' part of this natural
and common day.

Part hi. §. lii. 223

to be fomething fo multifarious and fo fine-
fpun in aftronomical calculations of the revo-
lutions of the planets ? why does a day confift
of T-4V-5-T 7 of a year ? and why muft tlie
year come round 400 times before it and the
day end at the fame time ? would not we^ if
fuch a work was left to our diredlion, order
it otherwife ? neverthelefs the hand of the
great Creator has made it thus. How is it
that the defcription of the tabernacle, and
of the Temple of Solomon, and of the divine
fervice in them, is fo furprifingly blended
together? We are not to lead^ but to
follow. After all, there appears more

difficulty at the firft view than is afterwards
found in comprehending the whole of the
matter. If any one cannot calculate and fo
comply with the direction in the text, he
may be quiet and let it alone : otherwife he
may violate the truth by a rafh decifion.
Without arithmetic one cannot conceive thefe
admirable proportio7is^ which are like thofe
of the fweeteft mufic. But arithmetic is not
all: and as Ikill in that and fpiritual difcern-
ment are not often found together; the truth,
as to this part of it, is fo much the longer

224 Introduction.

in finding admifiion. It is not however nc-
cefiary that all that would reap benefit from
the Revelation of Jesus Christ, fliouldbe
comoleat mathematicians, or but arithmeti-
cians. It is with thefe wholefome enquiries
as with the ecclefiaftical computations and
the kalendar; of which every man may
make feveral profitable ufes, without abufe
or fuperftition s yet every man need not on
that account, be fkilful in making them,
or give himfelf any trouble about it ; for
when there are but a few men in the world
at any one time to take care of it, the bufi-
nefs will be fufficiently well done. A com-
pafs is what a (hip cannot be without : yet
the pafl^engers may come fafely over the feas
without ibeir looking on it. In all things
there are diifferent gifts, offices and abilities ^
yet they turn to the benefit of the public, if
they are not render 'd ineitedual by a fpirit of
cppofition.

We have taken the looo years for com-
mon years, and yet reckon the 42 months,
for example, of the Beaft for prophetical
months. Should not rather, fome will fay.

Part hi. §. liii. 525

thofe periods be taken either all in a prophe-
tical fenfe or all in the common meanino-.

This ObjeBion is plaufible ; and thofe
who ftand up for the year-day, and all that
do not take to their affiftance the number of
the Beaft as a period of time, will find it
hard to evade the force of it. Hence fome
of them have had a thought come into their
mind, whether the 1 000 years too might not
be refolved into days, and every fuch day to
be taken for a year ? Which fancy is very,
juftly rejeded; and would ffill deferve fo to
be, if we were to take each of thofe days in
the middle way. For the 1000 years are
over before the end of the world, nay before.
Gog and Magog: and certainly at the paffioa
of Chrift the world was not in the beginning,
but plainly paft the middle of it's age^ fofar
is it from having more than 360, oir even
180, thoufand yearns tg laft yet. The pro-
phetical year, indeed, is called by one name
^^ma.'S\oq) Enicaitos^ C. ix- I5j. and the com-
Rion year by another (fiTc^) JS^c?;, C. xx. 2.
(for which reafon alfo this latter word EtoSy
is to be underftood with the number ^(^6,
Ec

226 Introduction.

igaxofl-ta £^>1xo^7a£^, fdl, sly,.) But this we do
do not offer as a full proof that fome of the
times are prophetical and fome common :
fince (^/Affa) bemera^ a day, and (fA»i') meity
a month, are ufed both in the prophetical
and in the common fignification. Yet we
ihould not entirely lofe fight of this diftinc-
tion of names of the year; fince two forts of
years neceffarily infer alfo two forts of mo7tths
and days proportionate to them. But here
comes fomething much more worthy of our
obfervation 'y the number of the Beafl not
only confifls of human years, nearly as the
loco years do; but it is alfo the Bowidary
between the figurative and the common times
and as it were a bridge over which we pafs
from the former to the latter ; and therefore
it is with great propriety that the 42 months
of the Beafl are mentioned in the text before
the number 666. We are not to expound
the times fometimes in the prophetical, fome-
times in the common meaning according to
our fancy; but before the number of the Beafl
is expired the Times zrt prophetical 2inA enig-
matical: the number 666 itfelf is />^r/^ enig^
maiical by leaving out the word year^ and

Part in. §. liii. 227

partly common^ fince this very word, when
we have once found the way to difcover it,
fignifies human years : and when this num-
ber is expired^ after a while come the yet
remaining times, particularly the 1 000 years
fo often mentioned in the text, in the com-
mon acceptation.

So here is a Gradation again, with the
trumpets of the firft, fecond, third and fourth
angel, there is no indication of time. At
the trumpet of the fifth angel begin the pro-
phetical months and other times of the three
woes. Under the trumpet of the feventh
angel, after the expiration of the number of
the Beaft, come (as before-mentioned) the
times that belong to the finifhing of the
Myftery of God, as C. xi. and xx, in the
common meaning. Juft fo, the expreffions
in the Prophecy from the iv'*" Chapter on-
ward are very figurative % but afterward,
when the angel gives John the open book,
are much clearer. Several things under the
trumpets are to be underftood more figu-
ratively^ and under the vials more properly
or literally, tho' expreffed in the fame terms.
And when the vials are all poured out, the

228 Introdugtioi^.

fpeech is yet flainer. For this reafon the
number of th« Beall, C. xiiL i8, is excepted
•from the figurative way of expreffion that
prevails in tlie middle chapters, as being a
human number^, or in ufe among men : and
•ib is alfo the human-angelic meafure after-
wardv C. xxi. 17, excepted from the com-
mon way of expreffion that prevails in the
latter chapters. Both thefe exceptions indi-
cate that the other expreffions before are to
be taken figuratively, and thofe that come
nfter,, properly. See alfo what is faid here-
after, in the Expojitioriy on C xi. 8, and
C. xvii. 5, concerning fpiritual and myftical
Denominations. After this manner does
this Prophecy always fhed the light of its
clearnefs and perfpicuity backward from the
latter to the former both Things and Times.
The Wisdom comes at the expiration of
the number of the Beaft (not that wifdom
which men acquire to themfelves by ever fo
ingenious devices of an acute underiEland-
■ing, but that which God beftows on us in
the V/ord of Truth) and from thence for-
ward the Wijdom will be continually more
and more diicovered; and oh! what an ad-

Part hi. §. liit. 229

mirably beautiful and immenfe fum mufl
that come to at laft ! Then alfo will the
times defcribed by the prophet Daniel be
laid open : mean time we need not be dif-
turbed whatever may be the proper length
of the days, ki his prophecy which belong
to the New Teftament ; §. i. God has no-
tified days and years in divers manners ac-
cording to his free and holy Will, as Gen.
xl. 12, 18. xli. 26, 27. Ifai. xxxviii. 5, 8 !
and fo the Revelation may very well be dif-
ferent from iXamel in the length of the times^
as it is from Ezekiel in the length of the
vie^Juring rod^ in §. xliii. N°. xxviii.

Some may fay, by way of a general Ob*
jedion, you dwell too lojig upon this bufmefs
of CljTOfiology : I would rather have fome-
i)^mgfiivoury and edifying.

I anfwer : when heretofore in my Plan, ^
I laid down a Summary of the Chronology of
the Apocalypfe^ it was thought too little ^^
now when I draw it out at large and diftindl-
ly, it is too much. How then fliall this
matter be adjufted ? We ought to receive
thankfully whatever God gives us, or re-

^ See Preface §, iv.

230 INTRODUCTION.

veals to us. He who has already edified
himfelf as he ought, in Faith, in Love, and
in Hope by help of the fundamental Truths
of Chriftianity, will find by refpedful at-
tention, a moft gracious nourifliment of the
Ipiritual life in any Difquifition concerning
the holy Scriptures, be it ever fo fpecula-
tive : for inftance, in meditating upon Da-
niel, as well as on Ifaiah. He who is out
in the Sunihine will get warm, whatever he
may be employed in befides. Whoever
confiders and receives every thing in a man-*
ner fuitable to the Defigns of God, will in
every thing not be long enquiring after edi-
fication, but will adually be edified himfelf
efpecially by praifing God in all his Words,
his Judgments, his Ways and his Works.
But whofoever flights now one thing, then
another thing, under pretence of its not be-
ing edifying enough, has not yet taken due
care to get edification even by what he reck--
ens to be very edifying. Let a man be only
right in fundamentals 5 and it will be found
how rich a Kernel is contained in the fl:ell
of chronological difquifitions.

Part hi. §. liii, liv. 231
In a word, if any perfon is puzzled with
thefe things, and cannot fee the reafon of
his perplexity, the truth of the matter is,
either he goes upon other Principles, or elfe
has no taft for this Way. It is to no pur-
pofe to begin to deal with fuch a man, till
haply he meet with the truth, upon which he
now looks fo fhy, from fome other quarter.
The Truth will prevail in due time: and
though the Fire at iirft lighting raifes a thick
fmoak, yet the Flame will break out ftrong
and clear.

LIV.

The other periods of time, colledled in
§. XXXV. and not yet difcufs'd fhall be treat-
ed of in the Exposition, and it fhall be
ihewn in each place whether they are pro-
phetical or common times. And thofe pe-
riods which are not fo exadlly limited but fall
in between others that are, for example,
the intervals between the three woes, fliall
be inquired into: and laftly thofe things
which fland in the text without any cha-
racter of time fliall be laid open : at the
ilime time the Reader mufl be referred back

232 Introduction.

to this Introduction whenever there is

occafiou for it.

LV.

In the mean time we have here a new
confirmation of what was remarked in §.
XIV y concerning the four Spheres or Cir-
cles. For

In the feven Epistles there is no other
time indicated but only the ten days tribu-
lation at Smyrna, Q ii. 10, From whence
it is evident that thefe feven epiftles do not
mean nor point out feven periods of time
that fhould extend, one after another, thro*
many ages ; but have a view feverally, to
the then feven churches in Afia, and all to-
gether to the whole Church of Christ
without diftinftion of place or time. Thus
this mark of time, by its being the only
one belonging to the feven epiftles, fhews
us, as by a glance, what they relate to.

It is juft fo with the Seals. For with
the feven feals there is no other Note of Time
(excepting that of about half an hour, which
is a diilerent cafe, as we fhall fee on C.
viii. I,) but the Chro?ios under the fiftli feaJ.
Whence it will appear that even this feal

Part hi. §. lv. 233

by itfelf extends '^from the firft perfecution
of the Chrijftians to the war of the Beafl
with the Saints, yea quite on to the Judge-
ment of the great Whore ; and fo the other
feals (which comprehend all things vifible
and invifible and the Sovereignty of the
Lamb over both), fiin on parallel with the
fifth.

Whosoever looks for fucti periods of
time under the {even Trumpets as imme-
diately follow one another, mufl make fix-
teen fuch at leaft, by virtue of §. xiii. Yet
it is evident from the widely extended peri-
ods exprelly mentioned from C. ix. to C. xx.
that the feven Trumpets, which are chiefly
againft the Kingdom of the World, extend
through the whole fpace from the date of
the prophecy to the end of all things, yea
even into eternity.

F f

s Viz. the ^virtue or ej}^ of it ; for the opening of the fe*
ven Seals by the Lamb being an emblemattical reprefentation
of Jesus Christ the Mediator's receiving all Power in Hea^
ven and Earth, i. e. of the folemn Inauguration of Christ
into his mediatorial Kingdom ; the Efe^ of it namely, the
Pojfejfion and Exercife of that Poiver ; mult continue till he
deliver up the Kingdom to the Father,

234 Introduction,

The feVen Vials by which the dilorderljr
power of the Beaft is defeated, pafs quickly
over : and therefore there is no time men-
tioned in the whole xvi'^ Chapter. They
begin the laft, and are the foft over.

The Viah^ the I'riimpetSy the Seals^ and
the Epijiles are beautifully interwoven 3 and
like the pipes and flops of an Organ, at
times fome of them are iilent, at others a-
gain all of them found aloud together.
LVL

Hence it appears that the Opinion men-
tioned in the Preface, §. vi, viz, that almofl
every thing even from the firft Seal to the
binding of Satan, is yet to come^ is utterly
groundlefs. Whoever would not be too
hafly in his decifions in fo important an af-
fair, let him maturely confider the admoni-
tions which will be given in their proper

Dlaces.

LVII.

Thus much is enough by way o? Intro-

duBioji: the reft follows in the Exposition 5

in perufing of which the reader is defired

ever to caft an eye backward and think o£

this InTropuction.

1 235 ]

*" :\yr:

THE

CONCLUSION

O F T H E

Expofition of the Revelation.

— ^■^^— — ■— "^^ i— ■— — — ■« 111

'^^^)S(HUS we have finifhcd the Expo-
^T y^ siTioN of tht Revelafion in the or-
)f^^^)J( der of the text ; but th.ere remain
yet a few things to be treated of, which
could not be fo fitly brought in on occafioD
of any particular text. Thefe relate either
to the Eixpojition in general, or to the nearer
determination of fome Times. Here there^
fore we ihall exhibit

I. A BRIEF chronological table of the prin-
cipal points of the prophecy and of the
completion of it.

II. A MODEST attempt of a more prcclfe
determination of the times of the Beaji.

III. The marks or charaBcrs of a true ex-
ffiticn of the revelation.

236 Conclusion,

IV. A DETAIL of the expedations of
jnen from time to time: or, an hijlorical
account of the expojitions of this prophecy thro'
all ages.

V. An account of the influence wliich the
cxpofition of the prophecies has had on hu^
man affairs,

VI. An exajnination of fome modern pro-
phecies that are handed about in feveral places.

VII. Some wholefome admonitions,^

* The Reader is dcfired before he proceeds farther to read
§ver again the xith paragraph of the preface attentively.

PART I.

An-E^^y^ofaCHRONOLOGICALTABLE

of the Apocalypfe.

V Sketch, according to the Text.

A\ M, 3940. Jesus Christ born.

3943. The V year of the Dionyflan
/Era, or our ufual way of
reckoning the year of our
Lord y which begins three
years too late.

i

Part I. 237

A. A\ Donh 30. Jesus Christ fufters, dies,

rifes from the dead, gives
fome hints of his revelation
(John xxi. 22, 23, Adts i.
7.) and afcends to heaven.
96. The Revelation is written by
St. John — Ch. L
The coming of the Lord
is declared to the seven
Churches in Afia and their
Angels — ii, iii.

B. 97, 98. The seven Seals are o-

pened, and on the opening
of the fifth the Chroma is
notified — iv, v, vi.
The seven Trumpets are
given to the feven angels
— — vii, viii,

C. The Lord cometh. John
is to tarry (Jo. xxi. 22) no
longer.

D. 11'' iii'^ iv'"' The Trz/z/z/^/i of the 1^'^ 11''
v''' Centuries, iii''' and iv'^ angels — viij.

E. 510— 589. The /;;y? Wo, under the

trumpet oithtfftb angel-ix,

F. 589 — 634. The Interval between the

frjl and fcovid wo.

238 Conclusion.

G. 634— 84o.The7^fcW Wo, under the

trumpet of the fixth angel

C. ix.

H. 800 — 1836. The Non-chronos and the
many Kings — x, xi.

L 840 — 947. The Interval between the
Jecoiid and third wo - xi. 14,

K. 864—1521. The 1260 days of the Wo-
man in the wildernefs after
fhe had brought forth the
Man-child, or rather, man-
ly So7i — xii. 6c

L. 947 — 1836. The third Wo, under the

trumpet of thefevenfb angel

xii. 12.

M. 1058 — 1836. Thc'Time and T/Wj and half
aTime ofthtWoman xii. 14.

jsj/ W'it/n»theIimtsT^)^Q Times of the Beaji m

of the i^rmes, ^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^ j^j^ ^^^^^

tion — xiii. 5.

O.1208&1209. War with the Saints. End
oixhcChronos mention'd un-
der the letter B. ~ xiii. 7.

^ TVithin the limits, ^f.] a more particular determination
of the time of this article, as near as it can be fettled, is the
fubjeft of the ii'» part of this conclufion.

Part L 239

P. 1 6 14. The Angel with the everlajl--

ing gofpel or glad tidings for

an Aion or Mwxxm to come

C. xiv. 6.

Q^ 1836. The end of the iVb«-\

chronos and the many

Kings.

The fulfilling of the
Words of God, and
finijhing of the Myfiery
of God.

The Repentance of the
Survivors in the ^r^^/ )xix, xx,
City,

The end of the poort
Time and of the 3 i
Tifnes.

The defirudiion of the
Beaft,

The 1000 Tears of the
binding ofSatanhtgm,,
R. afterward, The loofing of Satan for^
a little Seajon,
The 1000 Tears m
which thcSaints reign,

*xx. 3.4.

1:46

Conclusion.

s.

The End of the little Seajon

C. XX. 7.

T.

The E?id of the World xx. i i .

V.

All Things new xxi. xxii.

This Table may be look'd upon perhaps
as ufeful, perhaps as fuperfluous^ it will
however be of fervice to thofe who make a
proper and difcreet ufc of it. I call it but
an Effay -, and mdii earne/l/y protest and
enter this Caution, that I by no means pre-
tend to have adapted the years to every ar-^
tide with equal certainty. I only do ?.s Geo-
graphers, who often in their Maps fill up
the diftances between well known parts of
Boundaries and Coafts, as near the truth as
they can, on account of neceffary connexion.
But it is, at the leajl, adapted to iliew in what
Order the periods begin and end one after
another: and even when a clearer light fliall
break out, there will be found but little cc-
cafion for alteration, in the years, and much
lefs in the length, rank, connexion and dijlances
of the periods. And farther, this rough
Draught will be of fervice to enable the men
of thofe times to reftify what is ?iot fo exaBly
adjufted; which draught (N. B.) is here laid
Aownfo particidarly, only for that end.

Part I, 241

IF. Sketch, according to Hiftory.

If we take the principal hiftories of 16

centuries from St. John's days to our own,

adding the epithets which hiftorians give to

feveral of thefe ages ; we fhall find that the

Prophecy and the Hijiory of the Completion,

proceed together in order.

Cent^ 11'. The Difperfion of the Jtws by

Adrian — C. viii. 7.

III. The Irruption of the Goths and

other foreign nations — 8.

IV. The Age of Arianifm [Seculum

Ariajtiini] — — 10.

V, ThQ Extm^Ionofth^ Roman E??!"

/^/r^* under Auguftulus viii. 12.

VI. The Dijirejfes of the Jews in

Perfia -^ — ix. i.

VII. Mahomet and the Saracefis [with

their Cavalry] — 13,

VIII. The Contention about Image-

Worjhip — — 20.

IX. ThtAgeofPhothis: andalfothe

Ruler of the Natiom born x, 1 1.

2^2 Conclusion.

Cent^ X. Seculu??i irtfelix [in which the third

ivo began] — C. xii. 12.

XI. Secuhm Hildebrandimm \\kit Beaji

out of ih.t Sed\ ^— xiii. i.

XII. The papal Poie^fr begins — 5.

XIII. Crufade againft the Waldenfes [or

Vaiidois] — ■ — ■ 7.

XIV. T]\Q Age of WickUff, The middle

of the third wo. -*- 7.

XV. Tht Age of Coimcih \y\z^ at Con-

ftance, Bafil and Florence] the

middle and height of the papal

po\ver — — 8.

XVI. The Reformation — 9.

XVII. The everlafting or aeviternal golpel

xiv. 6. 8.
XVIII. The Adoration of the Beafi and
his Image — — 9.

The other intercurrent Points every man
may add [to this Table] out of the Expofition^
according to his liking. And whoever com-
pares thefe two fketches together will per-
ceive the agreement of the Prophecy and the
completion from beginning to end.

Part II. 243

PART II.

In which the Duration of the Beaji, and
how near the E7id of it may be, is con-
jeBurally affigned ; and thereby the chra-
nological Table of Part I'' compleated.

§• I-

Among all the periods that are now in
courfe, that of the Times of the Beafl chiefly
engages the attention of men, on account
of its end being expeded fomewhat fooner
than that of the reft. So if an expofitor does
not proceed very cautioufly with regard to
theniy many may take offence and be dif-
pofed to flight the Expoftion not only of the
'Ti7nes of the Beaft, but alfo of the Beajl it-
felf, and even that of the other Periods too,
nay of the whole prophecy. To prevent
this evil and injiijlice, I judged it proper not
to toucih upon this point [of the EW of the
Months and Number of the Beaf] either in
the Introduftion or the Expofition, or even
in the chronological Table in the firft part
of this conclufion .; but to delay bringing it

244 Conclusion,

on the carpet to this place ^ and fet it entirely
h ^^fi!f^ fi^^^ i^ is not proper that it fhould
be wholly paffed overUn filence.

Now with truth and juflice I aver^ that
tho' the event fhould vary ever fo much from
[what will be laid down in] this fecond part
(which however will not be found egregioujly
wrong) that will affed: this part only. For
the connexion of this with the reft is not
like that of a ftone with others in a wall,
which if it falls out feveral more muft folr
low; but like that of a fquare of glafs,
which may be crack'd or broken without
any damage to the reft of the window. Let
us fee then what ufeful truth we may meet
with.

11. Whatever God propofeth to us i^
his word is a proper objed: of our belief, in
great or fmall matters, fpiritual or temporal,
whether it be concerning things thcmfelves,
or their circumftances of place, time, man-
ner, &c. Infidelity is a conceited, ca-
pricious quality : it chujes what it likes, and
rejeBs the reft, and fometimes under plaujible
pretences. But Faith does honour to Gop
in every things When Sarah was pro-

Part IL 245

mifed a Son within ifhort time-^ it would not
have been right in her to have believed ojiJy
the promife concerning the Son^ and not the
circumftance of T'ime too. When God
told Hezekiah that he would prolong his
life 5 if he had pleafed to conceal from him
the fifteen years, it would not have become
Hezekiah to enquire how long. On the o--
ther hand Hezekiah's gratitude would have
been deficient, if he had acknowledged only
the lengthning of his life, but not regarded
the notice given him of xh^ fifteen years y un-
der the pretence of modefty. Had the
Ninevites believed only the threatned defiruc^
tien of their city, but not that it would come
to pafs in forty days ; without doubt their
repentance would not have been fo earnefl.
The Samaritan Lord would not believe that
mfour-and-twenty hours there fliould be great
plenty ; and it coll him his life. If the
Ifraelites at Babylon had difregarded the
feventy years ^ they would either not have
fuited themfelves to that flated tinier or they
would have been fo accuftomed to Babylon
that they would have longed no more for
their own country. And (to give an in-

246 Conclusion.

ftance as to the circumftance of place) it
was great ftubbornnefs in the Jews that they
would not believe Jeremiah when he forbad
their flight into Egypt, The more particu-
lar the divine declaration is, the belief of it is
the more difficult and the more uncommon,
but at the fame time the more generous,
and therefore the more acceptable to God.

Will you fay? yea, if St. John was now
living and would fhew us that part of the
Revelation which belongs to us, and the
determination of the times and other circum-
ftances ; then / would believe. I anfwer,
if St. John was now alive and fhew'd all
that, but was not known to be St. John:
people would rejed him in per/on juft as they
•do the bock he has written. Does it make
any difference as to the thing, whether God
<ryives it to his Church once for all or by lit-
tie and little ? But in the former of thofe
wavs our faith is much more generous, and
more fuitable to the maturity of faith under
the New Teftament. Therefore the I'imes
of the horrible Beaft^ fo grandly defcribed in
the Prophecy, muft not be a 7natter of indif-
ference to us.

Part IL 247

III. That the Beajl is the 'Hildebrandine
Papacy we have clearly proved in the Expo-

Jition^ VIZ, on C. xiii. i. from the agreemejif
of the prophecy with the completion as re-
corded in hiftoryj which proof alone may
fully fatisfy plain and unlearned perfons.
But to this we have added the fymtnetry of
the whole feries of the prophecy in the ful-
filling of one point after another. Both
thefc proofs can be comprehended by any
one, tho' he has no regard to Chronology
either the true or the falfe. But the calcii^
lation of the number of the Beafl confirms
all, in a manner that nothing elfe can, and
ftill the more exaftly we proceed in it the
ftronger is that confirmation.

IV. The whole duration of the Beajl (in
its three partitions, of which we have taken
a view in the expofition of C. xvii. 8.) falls
certainly within the limits of the Time and Times
and half Time of the Woman (which we have
confidered in explaining C. xii. 14) : and

* i. e. The Power ufurped by the Popes for more than
600 years paft, which was firll claimed and violently feized
by Hildebrandy a cunning and refolute man. When he was
chofen Pope, A, D. 1073, he took ths name of Gregory

the vn*\

248 CONCLUSION.

very probably it goes on in the manner i'd
forth in the Table which we fhall give a
little below.

V. The times of the Beaft being includ-
ed in the 3 ~ times of the Woman, and
thefe latter reaching but to A**. 1836 at
fartheft : the former cannot run out beyond
that year. So that a Table adjufted to that
term cannot he far from the truth.

VI. Ever fmce I difcover'd the folution
of the prophetical times, I have always placed
the duration of the Beaji between the year
1076 and 1836 j and do flilL But as this
duration is confider ably yZ^cr/^r than the fpace
between thefe two years, various confidera-
tions and reflexions on hiftory kept me long-
in fufpence concerning the proper term of
the beginning and end of it. In this cafe I
had in my view chiefly the prophecy itfelf ;
and when afterward I not only found a fuller
folution of the prophecy, but alfo by means
of that difcovered the true fum of the years
of the World notified in the Scriptures ; from
thence I came at laft to this determination
of the point, viz, let us reckon the firft rifing
of the Beajl out of the Sea to be the triumph

Part II. 249

of Gregory over the Emperor, at Canofa,
A° 10775 and iht power given to the Bea/i to
be the elevation of Celejline W to the Papacy;
and begin the number 666, to which the 42
months are equal, in difecondary courfe, at
the rijing out of the fea^ but, in xk^t primary
courfe of it at the commencement of that
Power. And here we may well reft the
matter, as there is no appearance of any
third Epoch to arife inftead of thefe two.
atitiemfement^

Since the Author has, in his Gnomon, fuhlijhed
tivo years after this, on a clofer attention to the fub-
jefff reduced the t'wo tables in this part to one, and
made fame imtrovements on them: injiead of thofe
and the refeBidns on them in this ii^ part, IJhall
give the Table in the Gnomon more fully exprejfed .
<ivith the principal Obfervations there made on it ;
as follows.

In my Expofition of the Revelation (Part
ii*^ of the Conclufion) there is an eflay to di-
geft in a table the 'l^imes of the Woman after
the wings were given her, and of the Beaf -,
which are now more fully explained and the
parts of them more exadly fitted together,
by comparing them in feveral places with the

prophecies of Daniel, And here let the

H h

250 Conclusion.

reader remember what I have often protefted,
oimodejty ^nA fobriety on this head, 'till the
event afford us a clear Explanation concern*
ing future things.

THE TABLE.

THE TERMS.

" A' 1058, Sept. 2' Wed. Thetv^o wings of

the great Eagle
given to the Wo-
man.

^ 1077, Sept. I'^Frid. The rifing of the

beaftoutofthefea,
in the perfon of
Gregory VII.

*= 1143? Sept. 25, Sat. The beginning of

the 42 months of
the power of the
beaft, in Celef-
tine II.

^ 1810, May 21, Sat.\Theendofthe42

June 1/ N. 5. jmonths,andof the

number of the

^ AH the dates after this are according to the Neiv-Stile 5
which was £rft introduced A^- 1582, and received latdy in
Britain, A^- 1752,

Part II. 251

beaft. Soon af-
ter, when the vials
are poured out,
the beaft is noty
butBabylon reigns
as Queen.
1 832, Od. 14, Mon» The rifmg of the

beaft out of the
Abyfs. After

one hour, viz,

^ 1832,061.22, Tuefd. The 10 kings give

their royal power
to the beaft.

' 1836, June 1 8, Sund. Thedeftruftion of

the beaft. The
end of the 3 ~
times, &c.

The Intervals.

The letters •' *»' ^' ^"^^ mark the ierm at which each Inter-
val begins, which is underftood to end at the next letter : as
the Interval ^ means that from » to *>> 19 years.

Days and Hours : Weeks and Days.

* 6938, 12 or 991, I f-

' 24i3o> 3 ttI or 3447, i fully.
' 2:43495, o or 34785^ O'

2^2 Conclusion.

^ . 8170, 22 11^^ or 1 167, 2.

*" 7, 22 |f7 or I, I almoft,

' i335> o or i9o> 5-

284077! GO or 40582 f in all.

They are alfo 5797 f fquare weeks; they
are 777 1- years; they are precifely 686 of
Daniel's units, of which by and by: laftly
they are tV*^ part of the age of the world.

We will iirfl illuftrate the Inter-
vals; and then the Terms.

The lUuftrationofthe Intervals.

Years.

^ contains 19 bating one day,
"" contains 66 —- precifely.
' contains 666 |4y precifely.
^ contains 22 HI fully.
* contains c —- very nearly.
^ contains 3 vfr fully,
together 45 ^y^ precifely.
together 1 1 1 f precifely,
together yyy -f precifely.
Daniel's 70 weeks confift of 70 times 7,
that is, 490 units or parts; which altogether
are equal to ^^^ j- years ; as we have fhewn
in C. X. of Ordo T'emponm. It is very re-

Part il. 253

markable now how exadly thefe Intervals
may be reduced to the Units of Daniel, For,

The Interval " contains precifely 588 fuch
Units which make 1 2 fquare weeks, i. e, 7
times 7 (or 49) multiplied by 12.

The Intervals ^ and ^ together, are 78
Units and not a Day over.

The Intervals ^' ' and ^ together are 666
units, or 275795 tt ^^ys^ which do not ex-
ceed the appendices of the days in thefe In-
tervals full 17 hours. A furprifing agree-
ment! for tht number ^f the Beajl is in fuch
terms of expreffion faid to be 666, that it
^laay be fo in feveral ways. (See the Expofi-
tion on C. xiii. 18.) Thus the number 666,
viz. in DaniePs Units contains th^jirjlandfe-
cond portions of the duration of the Beail,
whereas in Tears it contains the fecond only.

The Intervals ^> '> ^ together are 20 units
exadlly.

The Intervals ^> '' '- ^ ' are 98 units,
which are two fquare weeks.

The. Intervals '' ''' '> '» '^ ^ together yyy z.
years are 686 units precifely; or two cubical
weeks, that is 7 times 7 times 7, multiplied
by 2.

254 Conclusion.

The numbers (and the periods, which
are equal, the' enigmatically expreiTed by.
different numbers) in Daniel and in the Re-
velation, are moft exadly and ealily reduced
and changed into one another; which is no
flight proof of the truth of our refolution of
them.

The Illuftration of the Terms.

^ The wings given to the woman. Thia
is alfo the beginning of her 3 4 times. See
the Expofition on C. xii. 14, ' %'here JIj^ is
nourijhed a time <2c!

"" CoNCEHNiNG the rifing of the beaft ou^
of the fea, and the day of it, Sept. i'\ we
have treated on C. xiii, i. efpecially in; the
ninth thefis,- &c.

' Of the power given to the Beaft for 42
months, and of the beginning of thefe months
we have treated onC. xiii. 18, §. xii. This
fp^C^ is equal to the number of the Beaft 666.

'^ Vv^KEN the 42 months of power are
out, v/e muft not conclude that immediately
the Beaft is not-, for he %ims even before thefo
months. But, on pouring out the vial of
tlie fifth angel, his kingdom becomes fo

Part II. 255

darkened that it is weaker now than before
the beginning of the 42 months. Therefore
it muft be obferved, at the proper time,
whether that angel fliall pour out his vial up-
on the feat or throne of the Beaft at the end
of the 42 months ; and whether the Beaft is
immediately to carry Babylon, while he him-
felf is not. This Interval in which the Beaft
is not, is nearly the fame as the Semitempuf-
culum^ in Qrd, Temp. p. 318.

^ We take the one hour during which
the ten horns receive power as kings with the
beaft, in the prophetical length; becaufe it
comes before the thoufand years, which are
to be underftood in the common meaning.
See the Introduction §. Li 11, about the middle.

^ The Beaft with the ten kings (who had
juft before given up all their power to him)
fliall make the Whore defolate.

Rome was founded in the 3961'^ year of
the Julian period, the 2g'^ of Oftober (as
Des Vignoles proves towards the end of his
Chronology) on a Thurfday. From that
time to A. D. 1832, the 6545''' of the Ju-
lian period, the 22*^ of Odober, Tuefday,

* The Space of Z2 | Years.

256 Conclusion.

(which is the day mentioned in our table)
there are after fubftrading the excefs of the
Julian year, precifely 2584 years, or 1 2 6 1 8 6
weeks and almoft 5 days, from that Thurf-
day to this Tuefday. What will befall
Rome^ 76 years "hence, on her Birth-day,
will be worth the obfervation of thofe who
fhall live at that time.

These two Intervals ^ and ^ are moft in-
timately conne6i:ed. iToe faints fiatl be
given into the hand or power of that remark-
able Horn until A time and times and
HALF A TIME, Dan. vii. 25. The other
King when he comes , mufi cojitinue a short
SPACE, Rev. xvii. 10. On both thefe
paiTages there are many conjedlures in the
Expcftion on this latter place: but a third
paffage helps us out, viz. T^he ten horns receive
power as kings with the Beaji one Hour,
ver, 12.

Now, \ht f:ort fpace is the Interval '^ and ^
taken together^ for it contains the whole
time of the continuance of the other king in
the third part of the duration of the Beaft:
^ is the one hour : and ^ is the remainder of

» FromOaobcr, 1756.

Part II. 257

all the preceeding Intervals and contains 1335
common days. Prefently after thefe follow
the 1335 prophetical dzy^ (viz. of the length
ufed in Daniel's " prophecies, and which we
have fliewed, in Ord, T^emp, p. 379, to be
equal altogether, to 1000 years) promifed
in Dan. xii. 12 : fo that the miferable commoji
days of expectation and fuifering, are impUedy
and the 1335 ^^ppy prophetical days, to be
come to, or arrived at, are exprejfed.

The time and times and half a time in Dan.
vii. 25, fall within this Interval ^5 but do
not compleatly fill it : and I agree with the
Rev. Langius that they are 3 f years, but
confifting of 1278 days (agreeably to the
length of the natural year) not of 1260, as
he takes it, nor of 1333 -|-, which one
might think of.

But how fhall even thefe 1278 days
be reconciled with the 1335? Ifhall;zo/ an-
fwer, that either number is 3 years and a
piece or half, and not 4 years: as the Inter-
val ^' either with or without the addition of
li

" This is different from the length of the Apocalyptical

258 Conclusion.

the Interval ^' agrees with the antient tradi-^
tion, that Antichrijl is to rage 3 ^ years :—
but rather this, that Daniel feems to have
in view what the Beaft rifen out of the abyfs
is to do in the land of Ifraehy whereas in the
Revelation the Beaft has fomething to do
elfewherey before he comes thither: as the
deftroying of Rome, &c.

Our Table may be looked upon as un-
certain in fo?ne particular articles ; but the
nvhole of it, as far as it extends, is ftrongly
fupported both by hiftorical and exegetical
proofs. Thofe of the fix Intervals of

this period which are lefs precifely deter-
mined in the'Revelation, are determined out
of Daniel; as, the exiftence of the Beaft
before the 42 months, his non-exiftence,
and the ftiort fpace of the other kings and
the 3 -\ times, which Daniel had exprefled
in the proper tenns^ are in the Revelation in-
cluded in mcf:ort fpace: Again the time
which Daniel had exprefled enigmatically by
1335 days the Apocalypfe explains by the
proper terms of 1000 years. Surely

thefe things are not accidental! We do
not indeed ajjert every part with equal affur-

Part II. 259

ance : but we propofe them all, that pofterity
may have notice of what they are to obferve,
and may partly corredl, partly confirm them,
according to the event.

[Thus far the Gnomon,']

We are not. fondly dejirous of affigning the
ends or terms of the Periods : but when any
period (for example, the times of the Beaft)
appears from the text, to be fuch or fuch a
lengthy and is found in hiftory to have begun
at fuch or fuch a time ; the beginning and
length of It cannot be difcovered and at the
fame time the endho, concealed; which is in-
deed the principal, or even almoft the only
thing, fome perfons ufe to enquire after. A
modeft Expofitor does not buiy himfelf much
^houtfuch terms before the time ; but rather
makes the moll profitable ufe he can of the
fubjedl-matter. On the contrary thofe pitch
upon the term oyily^ which could not be con-
cealed from them, and at firfl make too
much of it, and foon after too little; and
befides, flight the falutary important truth
itfelf, of which that was but a circumftancc.
Were it only the ftupid or intoxicated chil-
dren of this world that did thus 3 it wQuld

260 Conclusion.

be nothing ftrange. But that men fearing
God and therefore fearching after the dif-
coveries made in the prophecies, fhould be-
have in this manner is a fhrewd token that
the word of God is as a ftrange language to
us and that we are far from the true Ikill of
fuiting onrfelves to the time, and therefore
are in the greater danger. How will

the watchman warn the people, when he
himfelf will not believe that the enemy is
drawing together his forces and approach-
ing? which of the two is the more raih an4
inconfiderate ? the man who brings certain
hitelligence of the enemy's coming, and be-
fides mentions the time when he co77JeBures he
may com.e; or the watchman who flights the
whole. Thofe are in a yet worfe con-

dition, who not only give over all watching,
but rejedt, with the Expoiition, all Prophe-
cy and the whole Scripture at once, making
no more account of the one than the other.
Thofe well deferve that they fliould fliimble
at the Scripture and at both right and wrong
Expofltions of it, ^;7^ fall, Ifaiah viii. 15.
This is the way of the fews, and of the In-
fideh too; an eafy and commodious, but an

Part II. 261

unhallow'd method. They quickly catch at
any thing in the New Teftament, or in any
part of the Scriptures, that feems to give of-
fence, rejoice over it, turn ajide from the
truth and are caft away. He too w^ho

makes this Conclujion ; There is no appearance
yet that it JJmdd come to pafs this or that
yeary therefore it will never happen; — or this^
It has not come to pafs this or that year^ there-
fore, neither will it in tbefe following years ;
therefore, an Expofitor muft not be allowed
to mend his term, or prolong it a little : He
too, I fay, not only deals very unfairly with
an Expofitor, efpecially when he afcribes to
him any opinion that is none of his, nor ever
was, but alfo greatly offends even againft
the word of God. The fubjedt-matter,
fuppofe is certain, and the length of the pe-
riod rightly determined : yet when the be-
ginni?2g of the period really has a latitude in
hiftory (of human compoiition, which is of-
ten not over clearly written, nor the feveral
fteps of its progrefs diftindlly remarked) the
end alfo muft needs appear to us to have a la-
titude : neverthelefs we determine this end
conjeBurally^ when either the length of the

262 Conclusion.

period and its conjeBural beginning point it
out to us without farther fearch ; or when
we cannot attain, otherwife than by a con-
jeBiiral to the true and precife determination 5
which the event at laft difcovers. Let us
take for example fome paji tranfaftion 5 the
fecond wo began in the VIP^ Century, as
many Expofitors have rightly obferved with-
out any affiftance from the fupputation of
the apocalyptical times. Now it may have^
begun A" 622, at Mahomet's flight; or A*
632, at his death; or A° 634, when the
Saracens conquered Arabia and Syria ; or
A'' 637, when they fubdued the kingdom
of Periia. From one or other of thefe be-
ginnings, 207 years (nearly the duration of
that wo) reach to A*" 829, or 839, or 840,
or 844, &c. A man that does not know or
remember the hiftory of thofe years is here in
the fame fituation as to the choice of one or
other of the years, as if he was to determine
the precife time of fomething yet to come : fo,
the event muft turn the fcales. Suppofe he
finds nothing confiderable in the year 829,
it is much the fame cafe as if he fhould {^t
tlie term of a period that is not yet run out,

Part IL 263

too early. But he is not quite miftaken for
all that : for no man can deny that foon after
that time the power of the Saracens was re-
duced, tho' perhaps no man to this day may
have enquired into the precife year. Ap-
ply this to the times of the Beafi^ which are
now in their courfe. Had they begun for
example A° 1073 ^'^^y "^^ft have ended A**
1739. And now that this term is part with-
out any great revolution, it cannot for that
be faid to be all over; only we are to advance
one ftep or more, from the year 1073 to
Ibme following year, or years, when the be-
ginning of thofe times may moft probably
be fixed according to the beft accounts hif-
tory furnifheth us. The more circum-

ftantially the conjectures are expreffed, the
more eafily can the fequel be obferved and
the failure corredlcd. On fuch an occafion
the number of the years may undergo a little
alteration, yet without any change of the
words. On the other hand where the event
agrees with the conjedtural determination, it
amounts to a ftrong confirmation of the whole
matter, and is of fuch confequence with re-
gard to the truth of the Gofpel, that even

264 Conclusion.

thofe that were formerly fhy and diffident,
and lookt on at a diftance, will after the
vidlory put in for a fliare in the booty.
If an Expcfitor fettles the ternis too pojitive-
ly\ a failure in any fmall point lays him open
to the cenfure of raihaefs and prefumption.
But if having made only a co^jeSlural deter-
mination of the precife time the event does not
anfwer; he is not aihamed (much lefs can
he be faid to be altogether wro^g) but bears
undefeiTcd reproach with patience, and only
waits (if men will but let him alone) a little
longer, as Noah did in the Ark. Now%

what has any man, either e7ilightenedWith the
knowledge of the truth, ovfceptic, ov /corner ^
to ojbjefttpthis ? And here I once more re-
feir my reader to §.. xi, of the Preface.

PART III.

The Marks and Charaders of a true

Expojition of the Apocalypfe.

Our Expolition is all along accompanied
with its proofs and evidences wherever they
are required. Yet it will be of ufe to re-

Part III. 265

capitulate the principal and plainefl Cha-
racters of the truth of it (each of them efla-
blifhed as fuch in the proper places) and to
bring them into one view, with fome addition.

I. The true Exposition of the
Apocalypse (in whatever it may confif!:)
muft be agreeable to the original text or an
accurate tranflation of it 3 and in thefe paf-
fages on which the arguments againft the
Roman-catholics are grounded, it muft agree
with the moft approv'd copies, and efpecially
with the Complutenfian° edition (which by
the providence of God, was printed in the
heart of Spain, before the Reformation) as
alfo with the very antient Vulgate.

II. It muft adhere to the very turn and
emphafis of the prophetical words andphrafes,
which are fometimes figurative, fometimes
proper.

III. It muft begin with fuch obvious re-
marks as have an evident ground in the text,

K k

« Complutumy now called Jcala de Henarez, is an Univer-
fity in New Caftile, about 20 miles from Madrid, ereded by
Cardinal Ximenes ; where he finilhed, A°. 1 5 1 5, that fplendid
edition (the firft of all the Polyglotts) in fix Volumes in Fol.
The Greek New Teftament had never been printed before.

266 COxNCLUSION.

and are' not liable to any reafonable doubt ^
and from thefe the reft muft be deduced by
juft confequences.

IV. It muft fliew the agreement of the
order of the completion with the 07^der of the
prophecy from one point to another.

V. It muft fix the beginning of the com-
pletion at St. 'Johns days,

VI. It muft extend the conclufion to the
end of all things.

VII. It muft go on through all the ages
of the world between thefe two boundaries, in
one continued courfe, without leaving any
chafms between.

VIII. The Intervals themfelves of the
three Woes are parts of this courfe, as refts
are of a piece of mufic.

IX. At both thefe Intervals, as well as
at the Eagle's crying wo^ wo, wo, it muft
fliew from hlftory the prelude to the enfu-
ing woes.

X. It muft make neither too great, nor
on the other hand too little account of any
point in hiftory, for example, the reforma-
tion, the aftions of a King of Sweden (how-
ever great a man he was) the perfecution in

Part III. 267

France, the Saltzburg emigration, or any
thing elfe that may ftrike us ftrongly becaufe
of its nearnefs : but take in the Subflance
both of civil and ecclefiaflical hiftory ; and
have a regard not fo much to the fingle parts
as to the whoIc\ in the principal points, prin-
cipal times, and principal places, fuch as
Rome and Jerufalem.

XI. It muft afiign a reafon why the
fevenfold Song of Praife in C. v. 1 2, has the
^article, the power, &c. ofily once ^ but in
that in C. vii. 12, feven times.

XII. It muft let every thing pafs quickly
which is not included in limited times.

XIII. It muft difpofe of the greatejl part
of the times of the New Teftament in thofe
periods that are determined,

XIV. It muft clearly fnew whether, and
why, this or that period is to be underftood
in t\\Q prophetical y or in the common meaning.

XV. It muft difcover xh^ftptenary num-
ber (of which the book is fo full in other
things) in the times alfo.

p It is fo in the original j tho' our Tranflators hav». over-
looked it in both places.

2&8 Conclusion.

XVI. It muft not difregard as ufelefs any
handle the text offers for the refolution of it-
felf : and on the other hand muft difcover
what is fufiicient for that purpofe, in all the
data therein to be found, taking them all
together : for example, it muft be able to
give a reafon why the five months of the
locufts are fet down twice,

XVII . In like manner, wliy we find fo
many periods of time along with the trum-
pets alone ; but with the churches only one
of ten days, and with the feals but one, a
Chro?2os,

XVIII. And why it is faid, the trumpet
of the fixth, of the feventh angel, and not
more briefly the fixth, the (tvcnth trumpet Sec r

XIX. Also what kind o?thh^dpart is to be
found under the trumpet of the fifth angel,
as we find a third part of the earth, &c, un-
der the trumpets of all they^* other angels.

XX. And wliat kind of Chronoi thefe are,
in contradiftindion to which the angel fwore
it iliould not be a Chronos more to the fulfil-
ling of the myftery of God.

"XXL It muft difcern and acknowled2:e
t%i^o intervals betvv^een the three woes.

Fart III. 269

XXII. It mufl fliew a caufe, why, in
C. xii. 10, it is faid, the power, not the
kingdom, of his Christ.

XXIII. And why the half time, tho' con-
fiderably more than a Century or hundred
years, is called only half 2, time.

XXIV. Likewise, why in C. xii, it is
faid only in the 14th Verfe, but 7iot alfo in
the 6**'' before the face of the ferpent ,

XXV. Furthermore, why the beaft
with two horns is called a heajl, only in the
xiii chapter, and always afterward xho, falfe
prophet.

XXVI. In like manner, why the word
year is left out in C. xiii. 18.

XXVII. And why at the number of the
beaft we find, "^ the wifdom, (>i o-o?>j^., y/ith
the article.)

XXVIII. It muft fo follow and aeree
with the pattern given in the phrafes or turns
of expreffion (for example, a number of a
man, a meafure of a jnan, that is of an angel)
that thefe phrafes, which have a reference
to one another, may be of fervice in the
expofition.

•J Omitted by our Tranflators.

2J0 Conclusion.

XXIX. It muft point out to us fucli times
as are near 3 from which it muft draw in-
ferences, of great ufe now^ tho' not fo ne-
ceffary for former ages : for this hook of the
crofs W2is not given us for idle fpeculation.

XXX. It muft not extend the times of
the Nev/ Teftament too far: but agree with
the points fettled in §. xxxi and xxxii. of
the Introduction.

XXXL Yet neither muft it fet the ei:K3
of the world too near after the time of the.
flying of the angel with the everlafting gof-
pel or ' geviternal good tidings.

XXXII. It muft not fearch the prophet-
ical numbers with a view to fupport any
proportions oi^Jymmetries of it's dvn devifizg-^

'iut attentively obferve thofe that are evident
iVt, tDe L cxl .

XXXIII. It muft give a., reafon, why
there are no times expreffed with the vials.

XXXIV. Likewise v/hy the word a?igel,
' is not expreily mentioned at each vial, as it

is at each trumpet.

^ .E'viternal is what lafts an JE-vutn or Alon^ viz, .z.iiz\

Years,

Part III. 271

XXXV. It muft compare the paflages in
one of which patience^ in another wifdofn^
&c, is required, with one another^ and
ihew \ht fuitabhmefs of them.

XXXVI. It muft not overlook the mani-
feft difference there is between the Beaft and
the Whore, nor their near relation to one
another.

XXXVII. It muft give a reafon why the
two laft of the feven heads of the Beaft are
called, not the fixth and feventh, but the
o?2e and the other King.

XXXVIII. It muft not make any times
run parallel to one another that cannot con-
fiftently do fo. For example, the Devil is
bound ^.t the beginning of the 1000 years,:
therefore his cafting fome at Smyrna into
prifon muft be before the 1000 years. The
abyfs is open when the locufts come out of
it, and the angel of the abyfs is their leader :

fo likewife it is to be when the Beaft arifes
out of it : therefore thefe fame '1000 years
cannot begin 'till after this arifing.

XXXIX. It muft alfo be a Key to open the
times, that wcrcfeard m the prophet Daniel.

* Viz, of Satan's being bourd and the abyfs Ihut upon him-

272 CoNCLUSIOxW

One may obferve more fuch fnarh in the
Expofition itfelf. Among thofe which
we have repeated there are fever al that may
be look'd upon as fomewhat too particular
v/hich yet in their confequences influence
the "whole difquifition. No Expofition

that differs widely from ours can have all
the now mentioned marks together. But I
neither can, nor do I defire, to prejudice
any man in my favour : I only propofe the
truth according to my abilities. Thefe

marks may be ufeful to the inquirers after
truth in feveral ways, for when one takes,
for example, the forty-two months of the
Beafl too long or too Jloort, and fets the be-
ginning or end of them fo much the higher
or lower in hiftory 3 yet he jiiay hit the mark
accidentally: and on the contrary, v/hen
one has got the right length of thefe periods .
but fets the beginning of them too far back
or two low down in hiftory ; he may mifs
his mark mfome meafiire. Yet we mufl not
for that leave the determination wholly to
the event; but colledt together from the
periods and from the marks or charaders of
the truth, v/hat may amount to a clear

t^ART III. 273

j3roof. By thefe marks then our and

every Expofition befides may and ought to
h^ JiriBly exajnined. And whoever can io
improve this prefent Expofition that it may
agree yet more nicely with thefe marks, will
deferve thanks for his pains. But let eveiy
one that has a mind to make any alteration
in it take care that, while he ftrives to make
it agree more exactly with fome one mark
he do not make it run counter as much to
others.

But befides all thefe marks; when we
confider the foregoing Expofition, and in
particular the Table we have given in the
firft part of this Concluiion ; there prefent
themfelves to our view fome other circum-
ftances which may be regarded not indeed
as neceffary requifites, but however as yery
fuitable properties, and confequently as an
Appendix to the marks already given. We
will go on then in the lift of them.

XL. In the firft part of this Conclufion

the Table, which is compleated in the fe-

cond, ranks its feveral points or articles in

the fame order one after another as they fol-

L 1

274 Conclusion.

low one another in the texts cited over a-
gainft them. And if one was to dafh out of
it all the iiumbers of the years^ yet the feve-
ral articles will ftand unalterably in their
places. Neither the beginning or end of
any one period can be fet higher or lower
than the beginning or end of any other pe-
riod as they nov/ ftand : and on the other
hand this unalterable order of the T^hiJigs
themfelves is a proof that there cannot be
any great failure in the determining of the
Tears paft or to come. Let us confider the
articles a little more clofely.

In the Table every period has its proper
length affigned according to one way of reck-
cuing either of prophetical or common days,
months, &c, or v/hich is equal and the fame
throughout the whole prophecy. The be-
ginning of each period has a diftinguifhed
importance in hijlory^ as thofe that are Ikil-
ful in it m.ay difcern without any view to
the prophecy. And in the progrefs the pe-
riods fit into one another in a manner that
is worthy of our notice : thus. From the
letter B in the Table to O, it is precifely a
Chronos or 1 1 1 1^ years : on the other hand

Part III. 27^

'tis not a Chronos (or is a Non-chronos) from
H to Q, but nearly a Chronos, i. e. lefs
than iiii-J and more than 1000 years, be-
tween which two there is no other ftep in
the Scald Seailorzm, or Scale of ' Ages : a-
gain from G to Qjthere is, by virtue of the
Antithefis confiderably more than a Chronos.
The very middle of each of the calamitous
periods H, L, M, N, happen one after a-
nother before the bleffed reformation :
A\ 800— 1318— 1836
947—1392—1836
1058 — 1447— 1836
1077— 1454— 1836
In this middle time fell that horrible dark-
nefs and grofs ignorance both in the eafl and
v/eft, in the xiv'" and xv'^ Centuries. Now
when this midnight was over, and by means
of the reformation it began to dawn, at the
fame time the period K ended. Hereafter
there may be an EcHpfe yet, but no more
any fuch long-lafting Night, and though
thefe four periods were far diftant in their be-
ginning, yet they end all together in o?ie great
and moft defirable point, in the year 1836.

* Viz, the antient Ages, of 1 1 1~ years each.

276 Conclusion*

Thus by the whole Table every article of
it, and by all ^^ fingle articles and links of
it the whole compages and coherent chain is
ftrengthened. It is needlefs to give the proof
of each feveral article at large : if one was
to compare every period with every other, it
would only ferve to make the demonftra-
tion the more perplexing and difficult by the
multitude of dedu6lions and conclufions. A
glance of the eye on the Table will do much
better. It is here as in the deciphering
of a writing in a fecret charadler; where
there is no need of any other proof of your
having found the true key, than that by it
you can open and explain the whole.

But if any Perfon can after all take thisi
to be a m.ere invention of human {pecula-
tion; fuch a fceptical difpoiition will for
ever keep him from receiving any other Ex-
pofition, however true ^ if a?20ther fuch can
be. Such a perfon ought to confider that
God has great patience with him, and fcr
that reafon to have patience with other men
who, he may think, come far fhort of him
in the knowledge of the truth.

Part III. 277

XLI. We will alfo bring under examin-
ation the whole Sum of the apocalyptical
Chronology, from the beginning of the New
Teflament to the finifliing of the myftery
of God.

Our Lord before his Afcenfion faid to
all the Jlpojllcs together. It is not for you to
know the Times or the Seafons (pc^ova? r H^iflou?
the Chronoi or Kairoi) which the Father has
put in his own power. Even here our Saviour
does not abfolutcly rtyV^, but in fad; gives
an anfwer to the queftion propofed by his
Apoftles. He does not fay, you mujl not ajk-y
but, it doth not belong to you ^ in quality of
Apojiles, to know thcfe times : and what
did belong to them as fiich he tells them im-
mediately after, ye fliall be my WitJieJfes.
Many of the Apoftles or almoft all of them
\\2L&JiniJ}:ed this their tejiimony, before thefe
Times or Seafons were revealed to St. John,
not as to an Apojlle or one fent to declare
thitjirfl, but as to a Herald extraordinary
chofen to proclaim the fecond coming of
Christ. Till then the Father had kept
them in his own power ; but at that time
let them be known to his Servants. The

278 Conclusion.

Difciples had in a bcdy allied^ Lord wilt thou
at this time (xf®''^) refiore the kingdom to Ifrael?
taking the word tijue or Chronos in the com-
mon meaning : but the Times or Seafons,
(the Chronoi or Kairoi) which the Lord in
Iiis anfwer puts together., with an emphati-
cal diftindion of the words Chronics and
KairoSy enigmatically import their proper
length. From the time when the Ar-

pofdes had borne the teitimony of Christ
in aIlthe%corld, and particularly in the capital
Cityy Rome, to the iini(hing of the myftery
after which they are here inquiring, there
is one Chronos and over apd above, three
Kairoi or '^777^ years near about, from the
year 58 to 18365 which is a Chronos and
Jhme Kairoi. This joining of the fingular
i2nd plural together would have look a odd-
ly : therefore the expreffion is altered ; and
as in I Sam. :Kxvii. 7, xxix. 3, inflead oi one
year and four months it is faid thele days or
thefe years, fo here for a Chj-cnos and fome
Kuiroi, it is faid, Chronoi or Kairoi.

XLIL Our fupputation of Time be-
gins with only refuting the moft prevailing
error?, and then exhibits a prophetical months

Part III. 279

year, day and hour not very plaufible, but
from whence neverthelefs, as we go on there
arifeth, as to the periods actually mentioned
in the text, fometimes a neat rotundity of
numbers, fometimes a feptenary, and on
comparing the periods one with another,
an admirable proportion.

XLIII. The true Expofition goes in the
middle-way, not only with regard to the
computation of the times, but alfo as to the
JiibjeB-matter. If others interpret too much
or too little of the text of invifihle or vifMe
oi pqft or o? future things ; this takes in each
of them in its proper place. It avoids the
difficulties and rubs, thofe Opinions are liable
to, which run out too far on either hand; and
has the benefit of all the advantages either
fide has over the other. All that Boffuet
objefts to or proves againft Jurieu, and on
the other fide Abbadie againft BoflTuet, and
whatever elfe pafles between fuch Interpre-
ters in the way of controverfy, it can lay
hold of and make to ferve as fo many argu-
ments for its confirmation and firmer fupport.

XLIV. In the true Expofition the three
woes go from eaft to weft in one direft track.

aSo Conclusion.

XLV. In general it is adjufted to the
horizon of the Ifland o? Pafmos all around.

XLVI. It contains in it the marrow and
fubjlance of all that holy men in all ages have
learned out of this Prophecy (as far as they
went upon folid grounds) amidft fuch a va-
riety of Interpretations. But of this laft
point we have fomething farther to fay".

" Viz, what immediately follows in the iv'*^ part : wherCj
in §. XLii, N". II, there is fhewed a Ihort method of dif con; er-'
ing the general plan of a72y Expojltion of the Revelation.

PART IV.

AN hiftorical account of the various
Expositions of the Revelation:
fhewing how in all ages of the New
Teftament the expectations of all^ but
efpecially of holy men, have been
framed mainly with regard to the
Revelation of Jesus Christ.
I. All the prophecies of the Old Tefta-

ment pointed at Jesus Christ either at a

diftance or nearer at hand.

Part IV. 2^1

II. By his coining in the jlejJo the promifes
thereto relating were fulfilled, and at the fame
time the longing defires of the Old-Tejiamenf
Chrijiia?is fatisfied.

III. In this Completion is immediately
intermingled, in an admirable manner, the
further difcovery of things yet to come under
the New Teftament. Liike i. 32, 33. ii. 34*
iii. 17.

IV. When our Lord Jesus Christ had
brought his firft followers and difciples, and
efpecially his twelve apoftles, fo far on in
their knowledgeof himfelf that theyconfefs'd
him to be the Son of God and the ti'ue
Messiah; he immediately began to build
the reft of his dodtrines on this foundation,
and fhew'd them, now that he had at lafl
appeared to fave the world, what was farther
to befall him, and therefore talked with them
concerning his fufferings, his crofs and death,
his refurredlion, afcenfion, and coming iri
Glory,

V. But a few days before his paflion, he
alfo foretold to them the deJlruBion of the
temple and city of Jerufalem ; referring, on

M m

282 Conclusion.

that occafion, to the prophet Daniel. The
Difciples, and without doubt the Jews in
general, were of opinion that the Wnple^ the
city and the wcrld would all come to an end to-
gether. Matt. xxiv. 3. But our Saviour in-
formed the difciples that the temple and the
city were to be deftroyed in the days of that
prefent generation of men; but that the
world was not to end at the fame time : and
on this occafion he inftrufted the believers
how they wxrc to deport themfelves, even
with regard to outward circumftances, in the
diftreifes that were coming, Matt.xxw, 6, 16.
. VI. Between his refurreftion and afcen-
fion he gave yet plainer fpecimens of his
Revelation : as we have before obferved on
Rev. i. I. and in §. xli. of the preceeding
Part III.

VII. After his afcenfion, the two men
in white apparel teffified to the Apoftles up-
on the fpot, that jESVsJhotdd come in like
manner as they had feen him afcend.
Indeed among fo many momentuous things
as intervene between his afcenfion to heaven
and his comings there is no one of equal mo-
ment with either of thefe : nay they are all

Part IV. 283

but fo many preparatory fteps for his Com-
ing, and from the Revelation they bear to
that arifeth their importance.

VIII. Accordingly from that time for-
ward \k\^expcBations of thtjirjlchrijliaits un-
der the direcflion of the apoftles, had that
Comi?7g for its great objedt. Yet thefe,
contrary to the mind of Christ and his
Apoftles, reckon'd that coming much too
early ; which miftake, tho' of no fuch eviV
tendency as the fcoffing of the men of the
world, yet proved a hindrance to the truth/

IX. Now, as our dear Saviour had inter-
pofed the deJlriiBion of Jef-ufahn between his
afceniion and his glorious coming : So the
Apoftle St. Paul did not look with unconcern
on the miftake of the Thcffalonians, that
the day of Christ was at hand and to come
even before the deftrudion of Jcrufalem;
but poftpon'd it by an exprefs declaration
concerning i\\^ApoJlacy that was to come firft,
concerning the Ma7i of Sin, and him who was
to withold him or keep him off: And after
the deftrudion of Jerufalem, the thoiifand
years and many things hefuies were interpofed
by St. John in the Revelation.

.384 Conclusion.

X. By thefe means was the church of tho
New Tefcament provided with the needful
tcftimony concerning future things, from
the times of the Apoftles to the glorious
coming of Christ, But the variety

of interpretations, we feq, began even in
thofe early days.

XL

With regard to future things, thefi were
the th'ee mai?i poiiiU one after another, viz.
Antichrist, the thousand Years, the
End of the World.

On thefe three points and on the rariking of
the twojirji (for it is evident the third of
them muft needs be the laft) the reader is
defired to keep an attentive eye in the rc-^
maining part of this difcourfe.

By the word Antichrist, which in St.
Johns epijiles has a more extenfive fignifica-
tion, we mean here^ in conformity to the
ftyle of the Fathers, the great Adverfai'y^ or
the Beaft:, who is defcribed in 2 Theffal. ii,
and in Revel, xiii, &c.

XII. Men continued to exped the Eiid
foon, and all that was to come to pafs before

Part IV, 285

it, was of courfe, mitraBed within as nar*
row limits as they thought poffible.

XIII. We find an inftance of this con-
tradion in what is called the '" fourth book
of Ezra. This book (too highly valued by
fome, but by moft men too much defpifed)
as we have it at this day (fee Scalig. Exercit.
308. and J. Gregories Obfei-v. C. xviii.) is
acknowledged by the learned to have been
written in the beginning of the fecond Cen-
tury, and confequently foon after the Reve-
lation ; fo that the 30''' year after the ruin of
the City, C. iii. i, muft be meant of the de-
ftrudion of Jerufalem by the Romans,
which is A. D. 100 and the 3860'^ year of
the Jewifh iEra of the World. Now

when it is faid C. xiv. 11,12, that the du-
ration of the world is divided into 1 2 parts ^
of which 9 ~ are paft and 2 f to come :
the author added the Jewifh iEra of his
own time and the apocalyptical 1000 years
into one fum 4860, of which 9 i twelfdx
parts are 3847 ;, and the 2 v twelfth
parts are 10 12 ^ years; fo that 3860 is to

^ This is called the z^ book; of Efdras, in the Apocrypha,
in our Englilh Tranflation,

16 Co-NCLUSION,

loc^o, nearly as 9 t to 2 4. On the

like ground fome among the Greeks have
reckoned the age of the world to be about
6500 years, viz, adding the 1000 years to
their ^ra from the Creation to the birth of
Christ 5508.

'^'XiV. The firfl Chriftians unanimoufly fet
Antichrijlfirjiy and the thotifand years ne:^t.
Hence it was that when any adveriity or any
"candal arofe, people faid pfefently this was
Antichrift, or a prelude to, or the begin-
iiing, or the forerunner &c, of him. He
that with-hcld the myflery of Iniquity was
the Reman Emperor, 2 Theffal. ii. 8. He
Aood equally in the way of Judaifm and
Chrlftianity and Antichriftianifm : for tlys
laft they mrftook for a branch of Chriftianity,
and that for a fedl of Judaifm. Some of
them m/ight underftand this perfonaliy of
the Emperor Claudius (fee Lightfoot's Ckro-
mc(Ms p- 1^4) ^^ whofe reign St. Paul wrote
to tiie Theffalonians. When Nerofucceeded
Claudius and behaved fo wickedly and
cruellv, they went on in the fame way and
held him to be that Adverfary. The like
thoughts were afterward entertained of Do-

Part IV. - 2S7

mitian, Aurelius, Severus, Declus, Callus,,
Volufianus and Gallienus, by the chriflians
whom they greatly diftreffed. Long after
Nero^s death a notion prevailed that he would
come to life again and prove to be the very
Antichrift.

XV. Thus not only the Heretics, but the
Orthodox alfo in general, fet the thcufand
years after Antichrift^ and confequently
far into the latter days^ as it is expreffly al-
lowed by the learned^ even thofe who them-
felves think otherwife. Rivetus de Patruin
Aii^oritatc^ C. vi. obferves that the Fathers
in Afia, in Gaul, in Africa, at Rome, and in
other places taught this; and as moft of them
lived very near the days of the apoftles, they
recommended this too as an apoftolical tra-
dition. Dallaeus de vero Ufu Patriim L. 11.
C. iv. fays of this error, as he calls it, that
it is a very antient one, and that in former
times the chriftians in general embraced it;
and brings this for a proof of it, that the
whole Greek Church maintains it to this day,
and of all the great number of thofe who in
their dodlrines have a regard to the writings
of th^ fathers, the Lati?Ji alone have departed

28S Conclusion.

from it, and that thefe did not avowedly
eftablifh the contrary opinion 'till K", 1439
in the council at Florence. Heidegger
avers that in Juftin Martyr^s days the whole
Chriftian Church owned it. Diflert. Tom. 1*
p. 653, &c. and p. 649 : and indeed Juftin
hlmfelfhas affured us of it as to all the Or-
tliodox in his time in general. See alfo
Vitringa in Apocal. p. 845 &c : and Poireti
Fofibuma. p. 643 : where they both without
ceremony, appeal to the antient Jewijh
Church: and likewifejoach. Langius's GAr/^
Chrip, Tom. I. fol. 270. So then it

does not depend on Papias alone ^ whotn
people generally decry, without regarding
what the antients fay to his praife,

XVI. Under thefe crofes the faithful
comforted themfelves with hope in the great
promifes. It may be that fomething hetero-
dox and carnal was fuperadded to them*
Yet we find no controverfy or difpute on that
head 'till the middle of the third century 5
and then, on account of thefe bad additions
there arofe gradually an mdifcreet averfion to
the thing itfelf, nay even to the whole Pro-
phecy.

Part IV; 289

XVII. Some however perfever'd in the
ftudy of this prophetical word; but even
thefe very early loft fight of the proper
length of the thoufand years. And dien
feveral prejudicate opinions concurred to
miflead themi 1. In conformity to the
feptuagint tranilation they greatly enlarged
the times of the Old Teftament. 2. They
received the jewifli tradition which co?2fraBs
the whole duration of the world to 6000
years. 3 . They had alfo a notion that the
6000 years, though already near run out,
fhould yet be fhortened toward the end.
4. They took the fmall part, as they rec-
koned, that yet remained of the fixth Mil-
lenary for the whole Millenium or 1000,
years, hy fymecdoche, 5. They took the

whole time of the New Teftament to confift
of no more than 365 years, being as it were
the days of that year of grace or acceptance,
Ifaiah Ixi. 2. 6. They began the 1000
years from the vtry Jirji times of the New
Teftament. Such opinions brought the

laft day much nearer than was agreeable to
truth : which Joh. Melchioris, with good
N n

290 Con GL¥ SIGN.

reafon, looks upon as one caufe why many
omitted to record the church-hiftory of thofe

times.

XVIII.

Wh e n, through Conftantine the Great,
Chriftianity got the upper-hand in the world,
the hope of future things decayed greatly
by their being fatisfied with the prefent. At
the council of Nice, however, there were
yet many remaining who had gone through
great fufferings for the name of Christ,,
and what notion that great aflembly heM
concerning the kingdom of the faints of the
mofi Wgh, may be feen in Gelas. Cizicen.
A61. Cone. Nic. c. 30. Yet the dread of ^7^'-
tichriji, tho' men were every now and then
put in mind of him by the Arian calamities,
went off by degrees, and the thouf and years
were by little and little given up -, paulatim^
fays Eftius; by which expreffion he indirect-
ly contradicts thofe who fay that in the fynod
at Rome under Damafiis againft Apollinaris
the noify herefy of the Chiliafts (as Baronius
exultingly fays) had its mouth flopped. A-
greeable to this is what we mentioned on
,C. xi. 2, viz, That Jerufalem which had

Part IV, 291

fceen trodden under foot by the Gentiles,
made fo fplendid an appearance under Con-
ftantine that Eufebius was ready to take it
for the new Jerufalem. At Conftantinople"
particularly the Revelation was very little
regarded : for among many Fathers who
lived in that neighbourhood there is not to
be found fo much as one citation from that
book.

XIX. Some began the 1000 years(whether
precifely that number or more or lefs) at the
birth of Christ: others at his paffion.
CaiTiodorus, in Complexiombus expreffes this
plainly : Alligavitque eum &ccJ i. e. ' And
* bound him a thoufajid years ^ Rev. xx. 2.
^ (This, fays he, is a Synecdoche by which
•* the whole is put for the part : for the e?2d
' of them is entirely unknown to us, but the
' heginnvig of them is by common conjhit of
' the fathers placed at tk^ birth of our Lord);

" Which was then die feat of the Emperors, and the fcene
of worldly eafe, pleafure and profperity.

y Alligavitque eum mille c.nnis (quod per figuram fynec-
-doche a parte totum dicitur, quando ejus finis omnimodisha-
betur incognitus, qui tamen confenfu patrum a nati'vitate do-
mini com put ant ur) ne credituras gentes libera poteftateconfun-
deret. In fine vero fecuH dicit eum ciTc folvendum, quando
multi martyrfis k confeiTores i-:nicr.te aniidrifio gcrminabunUt

292 Conclusion.

' that he might not, if he had had the free
' ufe of his power, confound the Gentiles
^ that were to receive the gofpel. But he
' tells us that toward the end of the "world he
^ fhall be loofed, and then there fnall fpring
' up many martyrs and confelTors on the com-

* ing of Antichrijl! The fame doftrine was
taught by St. Auguftine (whofe credit was
fufficient to draw in all the middle ages into
this opinion) j by Primafius (who alfo rec-
koned the 3 \ times as going on along with
the 1000 years, from the beginning of the
New Teflament to the end of the world)
and among the Greeks by Andreas Ccefarien-
fis, who on this occafion lays more ftrefs on
the date of the pafjioii of Christ. Scipio
MafFei makes the following remark on the
above cited words of CafTiodorus; "" ^tod

fiibditiir &c. i. e. what he adds, viz. ' th^t
^ in the opinion of many of the Fathers this
' fpace is to be reckoned from the nativity of
' our Lord, feems to refer to an opinion
^ held by 7?2a?2y in former times that \ooo years

^ Quod fubditur, fpatium hoc muhorum patrum fententia a
fiati'vitate Z)owzW computari, ad opinionem multis ohm fub-
ortam videtur referri> millejimo pofi Chrijium anno rerum univer-

• fitatem diflblutum iri & Antichrijium adventurum.

Part IV. 293

* after Christ the world lliould be dilTolv'd,
' and Antichrift fhould come/ Thus the
ORDER w^5 INVERTED, '3.Vidi\}i\^thouf and years
thus fliortned, ktforemoji ^indAntichriJi (who
delay'd fo long) was put after them and a
little before the e?2d of the world, T^hey took
it for granted that the thoufand years were
actually in courfe; and the coming of An-
tichrift, together with the end of the world,
had always been lookt upon as near. Of this
opinion were Laftantius, Jerom, the author
of the Opus imperf in Matth. homil. 49,
Gregory the Great, and others. But as the
iEra increafed without any confiderable re-
volution, men began again to allow the pro-
per meaning of the thoufand years to take
place at the end of which Antichrift fliould
come.

XX. Here indeed was a miftake, that
they wrefted that 1000 years in the xx'''
Ch. of the Revelation to this purpofe : but it
happened luckily that they fixed upon fome-
thing that chanced to be right in the main
(but fiewn to be fo by other arguments)
namely 1000 vears, ?2ea7'h\ from the firft

294 Conclusion.

itimes of the New Teftanient to the reign of

the Beaft.

XXL

Thus matters went on till die number of
.years came to be acilually looo ; ten Cen-
turies being fpent. * At the beginning
' of the eleventh Century there were fome

* (as Baronius informs us) who taught that
< the time was at hand when the Man of
j Sin, the Son of Perdition, the Antichrift

* fo called, fliould be revealed: and this
' was publickly declared in France (firft of

* all at Paris) fpread abroad in the World,

* and believed by great Numbers/ Now as
people expected the lail day at the fame
time, thev let the Churches and Monafteries
go to ruin, many Princes and Lords travell'd
to Rome, and many built Hofpitals for the
Sick and for Pilgrims, and even Abbies,
into which fome of them retired to wait for
that day. Fleury's Marnier s of the ChrifiianSy
Dr. Emiliane's Cheats of the Friep : T. i.
p, 130 &c.

XXIL Men were greatly forwarded and
confirmed in this anxious expedlation of
Antichrift, by reflecting on what paffed in

Part IV. 29^

the See of Rome. In the year 1000 after
the pajjion of Christ BenediB IX'\ was
Bifhop of Rome from A\ 1032 to 1045:
and in all appearance it was on account of
l^\s>fcandaIous youngfler that the Greeks looku
for the number of the Beaft in this name
BENEAIKTOS, which in Greek comes pre-
cifely to 666. (Compare here the Gnomon
on Rev. xiii. 18. §. xii.) A plain mark of
this is to be {ttw in the copies of Andreas
Caefarienfis ;* in which the name Bene^didius
is foifted in by the Tranfcribers, and like-
wife the rubrick or lemma concerning the
1000 years which where before reckoned
by him from the Birth of Christ (as may
ftill be feen in Arethas^) was adjufled to his
pajjioiiy that it might agree with the time of
this Benedift. However all that hap-

pened under him was at mojl but a prelude
to the reign of the Beaft.

* A Cappadocian Bifhop, who wrote a Commentary oa
the Revelation more than 500 years before the time when
Bencdift was Bilhop of Rome.

* The SucceiTor of Andreas, who about 40 yean after^
abridged or made cxtra^s from Andrews's Comment.

zg6 Conclusion.

XXIII.
At lafl came Hildebrand. By his

decrees and exorbitant aBmis many began to
fee, after fo many warnings, whereabouts
tliey were. What people in thofe days
thought of the matter may be found in ma-
ny writers. But Aventinus has comprifed
the whole in that v/ell-known and impor-
tant pafTage: Pleriqtie omnes boni &c\ ' that
' is almoft all good, open-hearted, juft, can-
' did and undefigning men have left it on
' record that the Reign of Antichrist

* BEGAN AT THAT TIME.' HoW CXadlly

they diftinguiflied between the Reign of tke
Beajl and Antichrijl himjelf is not eafy to
difcern.

XXIV. All the horrible things which
we read of this Gregory VIP'', are out-done
by what Cardinal Benno/>?/^///27^<^ concerning
him at that very time. Many, even amongft
Proteftants, will not believe him, becaufe
he was an enemy to Gregory. But we are
not fo much to mind in fuch a cafe whether
one is a friend or an enemy, as whether he

*= Plerique omnes boni, aperti, jufti, ingenui, fimplices, turn
imperium AntichrilU CcepiiTe memorije literarum prodidere.

Part IV. 297

be a confclentious or, at leaf!:, an honeft'
man. Virrue gams the love of men 3 and
vice our hatred : and love and hatred are
the motives that firft impel many a man to
difcover the truth of things either very bad
or very good, which otherwife he would
have kept to himfelf and concealed from o-
thers. Benno too reckoned 1000 years from
the beginning of the New Teftament to the
reign of Antichrift : and this may be one
of the reafons he had for not fparing Hil-

DEBRAND.

XXV. When the difturbances raifed by
Hildebrand were over, fome who had not
{t^n the whole of thefe horrible doings con-
tinued ftill in expecSlation 5 which as to the
very Antichrift was too early, and as to the
reign of the beaft was too late. Fluentius
Biftiop of Florence gave out, on the appear-
ance of a very great 'Comet, that Antichrift
was born : on which account Pope Pafcal
IP. went thither and in a Council of 340
O o

* The fame, as Aflronomers reckon, that appeared again
A°. 1680, and is predided to return A°. 2255, its period
being computed to be 575 years.

298 Conclusion.

Bifhops (fays Bellarmine) impofed lilence
upon him A°* 1105. At this rate the
birth of Christ and that of his Adverfary
would have had a refemblance as to the
Star and the ecclefiaflical affembly, Matth»
ii. 2. 4. What attentive obfervation mull
this have occafioned both at Florence and at
a diftance ! Pity that there remain no fuller
accounts of it. About the fame year

Norbertus affured Bernard that Antichrift
would be revealed during that prefent gene-
ration, and that he himfelf fhould live to
fee a general perfecution of the church. (See
Bernard's 56 Epiftle.) He died A^- 1134.
Bernard himfelf fays [Serm. 6. i?i Pfalm xci.)
Superejiy lit revektur homo peceati -^ i. e. ' All^

* that remains now is that the man of fin

* be revealed.* Many others fpeak to the
fame purpofe.

XXVI. The farther the iEra increafed,
men found it the more convenient to lengthen
the prophetical times in their Interpretations •
About the year 1200 flourifhed the Abbot
Joachim ; and as the ^ra was now not far
from being equal to the number 126a, viz^.
of the apocalyptical days of the Woman, he

Part IV. 299

and many others with him conjedured that
great changes were drawing near. (V, J. A.
SchmidnDifs, hijior, dePfeudo-evangelio ccte?^^
720 feciili XIII. §. VIII.) In the very year
1260 his Dodlrine was condemned by a
Council at Aries. He maintained partly a?i
Error, that we fhould take the 1260 days
for fo many years and in general an apocalyp-
tical day for a year ; and partly the truths
namely that \h^JlouriJhing times of the church
(we don't enquire as yet how they defcribed
them) and confequently the 1000 years,
muft come after the deftruftion of the An-
tichrijl,

XXVIL Others were aware that the
calamities had begun fome time before : for
example, the unknown author who wrote
concerning Antichrift, A"*' J120, cited by
Vitringa in ApocaL p. 747. And as the
Witneffes of the truth had {2ii& fo7y?2erly that
Antichrift was to come ; they faid 720W at laft
that he ixjm come, and that with a remark-
able unanimity and conftancy in that main
point. Confider the teftimonies according
to the order of time, in feveral writers and
particularly inGerhardi Confeff, CathoL L. ir.

300 Conclusion.

Art. 3. Chap. 6. Fol. 581. — 595. — 626:
and take notice how they fpeak of him ei-
ther as a calamity yet to come^ or ad:ually
prefenf.

XXVIII. The dark night was now fully
come on, and conliderate people began to re-
flect and bethink themfelves by what time the
day might break. Here again one term after
another was pitched upon. The antient
^ Techonius had reckoned the 3 i times to be
3 f centuries, or 350 years (as the Jews did,
in Juftin's dialogue with Tryphon)^ and
That the Waldenfes interpreted in their own
favour, and conceived hopes that in 350
years from the beginning of thofe miferable
times there would be better days: Vitringa
in Apoc. p. 464. From the Waldenfes
the Wiclilites and Huffites took this inter-
pretation: for T. Purvasus, an Englifliman,
A°' 1390 compofed out of the ledlures of
his mafter, Wiclif, then in prifon, an Ex-
pofition of the Revelation, in which he rec-
kons the 1000 years from the paffion of
Christ to the year 1033, ^^^ ^^^^ thence

« Who wrote A"* 390 about a thoufand years before Wic-
Jif s days.

Part IV. 301

^o A"** 1383 he affigns 350 years to Anti-
chrift. That Wiclif himfelf was of this
opinion appears from the 8^'' Se-lion of the
Council of Conftance, where the 9'^ Article
he is charged with is this : Pojl JJrbanum
VI. ^&c. i. e. ' After Urban the VI"' there
' is no Pope to be owned ; but we muft be

* governed, as the Greeks are, by laws of

* our own making.' The year 1383 fell
in the reign of this Urban. Rieger, in his
hiftory of the Bohemian Brethren, §. 412,
treats of the dodrine of the HufTites : and
Byzynii^s, there cited mentions that about
the year 1420 many in Bohemia were mif-
led (through an opinion that the kingdom
of Christ was in a little while to be
fet up and vengeance poured out upon the
Enemies) to fell their goods even at a low-
price, to betake themfelves with their wives
and children to the ^ Taborites and to lay

*■ Poft Urbanum vi. non eft aliquis recipiendus in Papam,
fed vivendum eft more Graecorum fub legibus proprijs.

s Thefe were a Branch of the Huflites who had. a Caftle
near the fmall City called Tabor not far from Prague, by
means of which they ftood out agamft the Emperor Sigifmund
and Pope Martin V''^ Crufade : and their Caftle was not taken
till A°. 1544.

noi Conclusion.

their money at the feet of the priefts, in or-
der to introduce a community of goods: but
that from thence there quickly enfued great
fcarcity and diforder, and time alone foon
confuted that error.

XXIX. In the middle ages, when the
Perfians under Chofroes, and after them the
Saracens, but efpecially the Turks, became
fo powerful and got pofTeffion of the holy
grave, the holy city Jerufalem, and the pro-
mifed land, many Expofitors interpreted the
Revelation of thofe tranfadions. For when
Jerufalem was recovered in the firft Crufadc
and loft in the fecond (which was zealoufly
promoted by Bernard who thought that was
the time the fulnefs of the Gentiles was to
come in, and all Ifrael to be faved) and the
third came to nothing; in the year 12 13
Pope Innocent III. fent out circular letters
to all faithful Chriftians pro fubfidio terra
fanBde, for the relief or recovery of the holy
land, in hopes that they ihould be more
fuccefsful now that the 666 years from Ma-
homet were near run out. After this
Petrus Aureolus, Nicholas Lyranus, Anto-
ninus Florentinus &c, interpreted each in his

Part VI. 303

Own way the 666 years and fever al other paf-
fages in the Revelation of Mahomet -, to which
purpofe alfo many even fince the reforma-
tion, efpecially among the Roman Catholicks
wreft fiich texts. When befides all

this the Ottoman Port was eftablifhed about
the beginning of the XIV'^ Century, Expo-
fitors of this fort took up a fancy that this
was the timein which Satan was loofed (how-
ever, people had an eye at the fame time, to
the abominations of Popery) and fo reckoned
1000 years backward looking for thebegin-
ing of them in Conftantine's time. Fox,
Gerhard and Hoe cite Gualterus Brutus,
Ubertinus de Cafalis, Ferdinandus del Caf-
tillo and Jacobus de Teramo as of this opi-
nion, which chiefly Brightman among the
moderns has advanced. Others begin

the 1000 years with Calixtus II, who muft
needs be the Angel, and the Emperor the
Dragon whom he bound by wrefting from
him the right of Inveftitures A°- 1122, 112 3:
others with Innocent IIP, who eftablifh'd
the Orders of the Dominicans and Fran-
cifcans A""* 1215. Thus was the

3^4 Conclusion.

confufion of the times of the Beaft and of the
I GOO years brought to the utmoft height:
however thereby a way was opened for fet-
ting them again in their right order, viz, the
times of the Beaft firft, and the i ooo years
after, and from hence Joannes Viterbienlis,
A°' 148 1, gave Sixtus IV great hopes of vic-
tory over the Turks (whom he took for the
Beaft, as Innocent before did the Saracens).
and_of the 1000 years. See Seb. Meyer in
ApocalfoL 80.

XXX.
With the Reformation there iprung
up a new hght in prophetical as well as other
matters ; and Luther found the Hildebrandine
papacy emblematically reprefented inCh.xiii.
of the Revelation. At the fame time he
could not be unacquainted with the above-
mentioned ^ 350 years, fmce he had caufed
the faid book of Purv^eus to be printed, with
a preface of his ow^n, at Wittenberg, A°*
1528: but he faw they were manifeftly too
fhort, and therefore laid hold on fomething
that was righter, namely the 666 years^
He was fatisfied that the xiii'^ Ch. of the

*> In the beginning of §. xxviii.

Part IV. 305

Revelation has no view to the Turk, but to
the Pope 5 and in confequence of that, in his
marginal notes expounds the 666 years of
the duration of the worldly papacy. Bibli-
ander was alfo one of the firft who acknow-
ledged this 5 and among the reformed in
France Jac. Capellus, and in England Tho-
mas Lydyat did the fame. How Sera-
phinus de Fermo and others bufied them-
felves from that time to wreft fometimes one
fometimes another pafTage of the Revelation
that contained a defcription of any horrible
thing, to apply it to Luther and the Refor-
mation, is not worth mentioning. But Lu-
ther's Expoiition ought in reafon to be look'd
upon as a coniiderable part of this whole
teftimony; tho* veiy few, even in the pro-
teftant church, have hitherto duly regarded
it. He held that Antichrift was now plainly
revealed, and agreed with Lucas Brugenfis
and others who reckon 6000 years to be
the whole time that the world is to lafl.
Hence he concluded that the lafl: day was
not far off, and fo there was not fufficient
fpace remaining for the 1000 years to couie >

pp

3o6 Conclusion.

for which reafon he could not reckon them
more conveniently than from the beginning
of the New Teftament to Gregory VII.
This appears from his Stipputatio^ or reckon-
ing of the years of the world, publiihed not
long before his Death. Befides, in his

preface to the Revelation and his notes on it,
there are contain'd the following Positions.
I. Thtjlrji wo is great; the fecond greater ;
the third the greateft of all. 2. The^^-

cond ICO began in the feventh Century, in the
Saracen hiftory. 3. The third wo in C.

xiii, is the worldly papacy. 4. This be-

ean in Hilde brand, c. It will laft 666

years. 6. The third wo and the kytn

vials are under the trumpet of the feventh
angel. 7. The third wo will be checked

by the vials. 8. The 1000 years are, in

the proper fenfe, 1000 years. 9. The

1000 years and the times of the Beaft can-
not coincide for ever fo fhort a time. Other
Expoiitors have maintained fome one, and
fome another of thefe Pofitions feverally : but
Luther (and to the beft of my knowledge,
he alone to this day) grafped all of them to-
gether in his comprehenfwe knowledge, tho'

Part IV. 307

fo long ago. Now let us add to thefe,
one poiition more (which in no wife dif-
agrees with the former nine, but is rather a
confequence of them, and is maintained by
Luther's fellow-labourer Francis Lambert in
his Exeg. Apcc, p. 233, 286) namely this,
10. That the times of the Beaft go before
and the 1000 years follow after; and then
we have all the grounds of a true Expojition.

XXXL Andrew Osiander the elder
went another way to work. He fought for
the number of the Beaft in the hebrew word
n"'^t2in, (Rumiit) and at the fame time gave
occafion to people's gradually quitting the
number 666 in reckoning the duration of
the Beaft, and efpoufing that of 1 260. Ex-
amine his ConjeB, de ultimis tempor. & fine
jmmdiy publifhed at Nuremberg, A°* 1544;
and his fon-in-law Funckius's Illuftration of
the Revelation, p. 162, 203, 365 of the edi--^
tion of 1596. Some fuppofe both the

numbers,* 666 and 1260, to run on parallel,
and affign the latter to the duration of the
fpiritual, and the former to that of the
worldly power of the Beaft ; as the Centuri-
atcrs of Magdeburg, the Syntagma N. T.

3o8 Conclusion.

(which has great affinity to their work) Jo.
Balasus, Raph. Eglinus, Zach. Muthefius,
Melch. Kromayer, and others. But the
well-grounded 666 years were overborne
by the ill-grounded 1260 years, by n^'^tsi'n,
and by other fuch names, efpecially in Flacii
Glojfa and other Expofitions that had a great
run. Bellarmine, and fuch as he, were not
foriy for this : but many proteftants have
ftuck to this period of 1260 years, in their
controverfial writings and their Expofitions,
as Hoe, PariEus, Gerhard, Cluver, Cravius,
Cocceius, &c.

XXXII. Now this Year-day^ has had
many troublefome confequences : ( i ) When
the 666 years were little minded, the Hilde-
brandine-period, which had formerly been
look'd upon by all confiderate perfons as fo
important, came to be forgotten, or at moft
made but a part of the papal period. They
were unwilling to begin their 1260 years at
Gregory VII, or lower dov/n ; for that would
have made the time too long for them that
thought the final ruin of Antichrift and the

M. e. the taking each of the 1260 days in the Prophecy to
fignify a year.

Part IV. 309

laft day were very near; and the time of
their waiting for thefe future things would
have been too much extended, delay'd and
rendered uncertain : fo they muft needs be-
gin higher, and thereby left too little ropm
for thofe things which, in the prophecy, pre-
ceeded the rifing of the Beaft. Many alfo
of their predidlions failed one after another,
efpecially in the time of the perfecution of the
reformed in France, which made fport for
their adverfaries. (2) Thus the length

of this period of 1260 years, when it pre-
vailed, obliging them to fet the beginning
of the times of the Beaft too high in hiftory,
for example A°* 257, 450, 600, 800, (a
wide difference !) put a ftop to all comparing
of the prophecy and hiftory : and many had
the affurance to reckon among the lim.bs of
Antichrift the holy Bifhops of the antient
church of Rome, the latchet of whofe fioes
(fays Petrus Crugotius) they were not ivorthy
to unloofe. (3) Efpecially, the teftimony
of the truth againft Popery, in fo far as it is
grounded on this Prophecy, was greatly im-
peded. (4) No room could be found
for the 1000 vears : fo, whereas ail the an-

3IO Conclusion.

tients had placed them either wholly after or
wholly before the times of the Beaft, now
men came to allow fome part of the looo
years, or the whole of them, to run parallel
with fome pai't of the 1260 years. Nay
fome begin both the 1260 years of mifery
and the looo years of happinefs together, at
Conftantine the Great, as Napier 3 or both
together about the timeof Charles theCreat,
as Matth. Hoffman : the former of whom
is nearly foUow'd by B. P. Carl, and the
latter by Cafp. Heunifchius.

XXXIII. The Anabaptiftical, premature
and frantick notions of the Millennium (a-
gainli which the confeffion of Aufburg bears
a proper teftimony) greatly contributed to
bring in anew, among fome men, a great
indifference about the Revelation, and a-
mong ?nany about the 1000 years, efpecially
as they thought thempa/l long ago. If any
one but gave a hint of 1000 years yet fo
come, he was fufpe6ted; and thofe were com-
mended who thought themfelves not bound
to make open confeffion of them. Thefe
therefore took up the thing fo much the more
warmly, and found means to make the very

Part IV. 311

namcof theMillcnniumor 1000 years odious.
See Crameri arbor hceret. confangidn, p. 76.
Yet in the year 1554 at Balle fome learned
Refugees bore noble teftimony to the 1 000
years to follow after the overthrow of Anti-
chrifl 3 fuch as Sebaft. Caftellio in the pre-
face to his tranflation of the Bible, and Mar-
tin Borrhaus on the xx^*" chap, of the Reve-
lation (tho* thefe two had had difputes upon
other points); like wife Coelius Secundus
Curio in his Book de amplitudine regjii Deiy
and Alphonfus Conradus Mantuanus in
ApocaL

XXXIV. There had been a long time
an expedation that in the year 1588 the
world would come to an end, or at leafl
there would be very great revolutions in it.
Jo. Guil. Stuckius publiflied a particular
treatife on that fubjedt, at Zurich, that very
year 1588. Take the fubftance of what is
faid by J. J. Hojffman hijl, pap, ad A, 12 19,
Flacius cataL tefi, verit. §. 173, Gerhard.
he, de extr.jud. §. 78, and Conrad. Brufs-
ken's appendix to Beverley's chronology;
and we fhall find as follows, viz, antiently
people added to the rife of Mahomet the

312 Conclusion.

number of the Beaft, and becaufe of the
fum of thefe two, 622 and 666, were intent
upon obferving the year 1288. About
tliat time the Chriftians loll what they had
'till then kept poffeiTion . of in Syria; and
men deceived themfelves with this prognof-
tic, ^'^ mimdo in cc/itum annisy i. e. wo to
the world within thefe ico years 3 and fo
made a miftake alfo about the greateft and
laft antichriftian calamities, which they
thought would come to an end A°* 1388.
When nothing happened that year, they
added another and then another 100, and
fo brought it to 1488 and 1588; and made
alfo aftrological calculations of them. At laft
they left off this way and no longer added
the 666 years to Mahomet's times, but to
the year 1032, to v/hich they reckoned 1000
years from the pajfion of Christ. On this
ground tliey were willing to fuppofe that in
the year 1698 there would follow the de-
ftrudtion of the Turk and Popery, and the
fpreading of Chriftianity over all the world,
Lambertus Danceus inverts this order, rec-
koning the 666 years from the paffion, and
then adding the 1000 years; de Antich, p.

Part IV. 313

98. 108. compare with this Dudleij Fenneri
T^hcologia^ p. 172. Edit. A°' 1589. Others
reckoned from the birth of Christ : whe-
ther they put the 1000 years firft or laft it
matters not; but a great expectation there
was againft the year 1666, the treatife cal-
led Romcs RuinaJiJialis goes altogether upon
this fcheme, which gave a handle to Spize-
lius and Artopoeus for further reflexions.

XXXV. By fearching the Scriptures men
are 7iow again come near to the ancient truth.
In the beginning of the laft century J. Pif-
cator, and others, put the reign of the Beaft
and Antichrift before the 1000 Years, and
aver'd that all is not yet fulfilled that is fore-
told to come before the end of all things.
In like manner Dan. CrameruSj in his Bible
with Notes, acknowledgeth that the 1000
years in C. xx. 2. do not begin till after the
Hallelujah and after the Vicflory in C. xixi
I, 1 1, but he interpreted them of the peace
of the church &c, (much in the fame way
as Cotterius, Zeltnerus and Mommers) and
befides, as he held the end of the world to
be very near, he extends the 1000 years to

314 Conclusion.

fcarcely more than the age of a man; in
which Franc. Lambertus went before him,
and Zach. Hogelius, Joh. Schindlerus, Nic.
Mulerius, Joh. Brunfmannus and Melch.
Kromayer differ but httle from him. The
more conftrain'd this Interpretation is, the
more clearly it fhews that thefe Expofitors
were fenfible of the connexion between the
xix'^ and the xx''' Chapter.

XXXVI. Afterward many were roufed
anew to a diligent inquiry into this point by
means of Cocceius : however, they fuifer'd
themfelves to be milled, by their feveral
^ ptTiods or ages of the churchy into many oin-
profitable extravagancies.
XXXVII.

A WIDE Door was opened by the worthy
Spencr^ w^ho brought again into view the
hope J as he and others called it, of better times %
and who carefully avoided all meddling with
particulars, (as was very fuitable to this new
beginning) but maintained his main point
with great ferioufnefs and fteadinefs, and
with full affurance, to his death. Ever

^ See the Introdudion, §. xiii : andN^.iii of §- xxxviii
of this part of the Conclufion.

Part IV. 315

fince tlien the truth, in this point, has been
making its way more and more powerfully,
tho' incompafied with many errors.

XXXVIII. The writers who now meet
with the moil general approbation are of
three Sorts. i. Some interpret almoft

every thing of the judgments upon the Jews,
or on them and the Heathen alfo, early in
the beginning of the New Teftament ; and
reckon the 1000 years from the afcenfion
of Christ, or from Conftantine the Great.
Such is the opinion of Grotius, Hammond
and the Author of the Frcenotiones apocalyp-
ticcc^ i^c. Here the times are taken always
in the common acceptation. Boffuet takes
this way of reckoning for granted, and be-
fides he places Antichrifl only a fliort time
before the end of the world. 2. Others

ftill abide by the year-day and the period of
1260 years : and thofe of them who place
the Beaft before the 1000 years affign very
different terms when the one lliould end
and the other begin. Jofeph Mede was
one of the principal abettors of the period of
1260 years, and was followed by Henry
More, Peganlus, Jurieu and others. To

3i6 Conclusion.

this clafs belong Newton, Sandhagen, Du-
rer, Schweitzer, Zeltner, Samuel Konig,
Scheurman, Abbadic, Crinfon, Drieilen,
Malfchius, Kohlreiffius, Stockius, &c, tho'
as to the looo years they differ widely from
one another. 3. Many labour to fill

up the whole ipace from St. John to us with
only the feven Churches, or the figurative
interpretation of them, and maintain that
almoft every thing from the hrfl feal to the
1000 years is yet to come ; and fo they too
take the times in the ccmmon acceptation .
See §. vij VII. of the Preface, and Hedin-
ger's preface to the Revelation in his Nev/
Tejftament with Notes,

XXXIX. It is ?20t to be 'wondered at that
amidft fo many difficulties, and after fo many
terms afligned that have paifed without ef-
fedt, many men of underftanding have in a
manner given up all fludy of the Revelation
and confin'd all their reliedions on it to fome
general and v/ell-know^n heads of docflrine
viz, that the Church fliall be always frrait-
ned but never fhall be crufli'd ; and have
brought the reckoning of times almoil into
difufe. Markius's Commentary on the Apo-

Part IV. 317

calypfe may ferve for an example of this ;
for he there fkilfully confutes many wrong
opinions, but as above-mentioned on C. vi.
8. rarely advances any thing himfelf.

XL. Nobody fo far as I know, has hit
the mark, in thofe points that are the moft
necefTary for the prefent time^ more nearly
than Campegius Vitringa. He has gone
back to Gregory VII. (asNic. Mulerius had
alio done) and has difcovered and demon-
ftrated the agreement of the prophecy and the
completion in xh^faBs themfelves, without
helps from the calculation of the ti772cs, for
he had a miilruft of the year-day, and yet
did not for that depend upon the CGmmon
day. By this he has given a notable blow
to both thofe erro?ieous reckojiwgs, and has
not fallen much fliort of the true, which
goes in the middle way between them. See
his Afiacrifs apocal p. 460 &c. In this
path he leads his reader through the rage of
the enemies and the overthrow of them, di-
red:ly to the contents of the xx'^ chapter.

XLI. Thus the true and ancient order is
reftored: viz. Antichrist, the Thou-
sand Years, the End of the World.

3iS Conclusion.

XLIL
This may ferve for a brief History of
the ExPosiTio;^^s of this Prophecy, accord-
ing to ^€vl principal variations', from whence
many advantages may accrew to thofe who
deiire to profit by it. I. Vv'e may fee how

amidft this ftrange and manifold variety of
opinions the progrefs of the truth has been re-
tarded through the juflling of fo many errors;
and yet glimpfes of it have been feen in all
Ages, and it has made its way through them.
IL Let any one, antient or modern Expoii-
tor of the Revelation fall into a man's hands;
he needs only to look how he explains the
forty two months of the Beaft, the 7mmher of
theBeaft, z.vA\h.^thoiifand years: and thereby
he will prefently fee what grounds he goes
upon, and fo be able to avoid x!cizfa!f\ and
receive the truth and make farther profici-
ency in it. III. Hence it is manifeil

that the condiiB of men in their affairs de-
pends in a great meafure on the true and on
thcfalfe interpretation of the prophetical word:
and hereby we are admoniflied to fuit our-
fclves wdfely to the times we live in. The
follov/ing V'^ part treats more at large of
this iubied".

Part IV. 319

XLIII. But efpecially, hereby fome er^
rors fall to the ground, either aiitient ones
which in modern times hav« been plaufibly
fet off, or new and lately fprung up: fuch
as I. The error that the times of the

Beafl and the "1000 years run on parallel
with one another. However narrow the
bounds were into which the antients other-
wife contracted the times, they never allowed
the leaft part of thefe two periods to be co-
temporary. II. The error that the
1000 years began in Conftantine's time,
III. The error that a Day in the Revelation
figmfiQ^ Jometimes a common Tear^ or 'e^ejy
where a common Day, On the other
hand we are the more feniible of the benefit
oi^^ fundamental pofitiojis^ and the marks of
a true Expofition which we have laid down
in § XXXI, XXXII of the Introduction, in
the Iir part of the conclufion, and in §. xxx
of this IV part.

XLIV. The more ftriClly any man ihall
examine this whole ^ ilhijlration of the Reve-
lation^ the more, I hope, he will be convinced

' Viz, the introduclion, the expofition itfelf, r.nd the con-
clufion.

320 Conclusion.

that I avoid air the abovementioned errors,
and propofe nothing that clashes with the
true principles, but rather adopt them all.
As to the calculation of the times, many
have p-one in the middle "way before me: "" fo
I offer nothing new on that head but a pre-
cife determination of the length of the prophe-
tical times, which goes in that middle way.
^his is not only co?ifiJlent nviih thofe things
v/hich have been formerly difccveredby others-,
but alfo CONFIRMS the7n and is confirmed by
them. And thus there appears again that
agreement W^-\ former Expofitions which was
required in the end of the IIP Part. 'Tis
true the truth of the Expofition of the word
of God, in prophetical as well as other
points, by no means depends on the confent
of men in their opinions, or on their autho-
rity; yet it is of great ufe to read former wri-
ters: for as every man who writes any thing
now hopes to benefit others (if he does not,
he would do better to let alone writing); fo
he ought candidly to judge that others before
him wrote with the like hopes, and con-

"* See Introd. ^. liii.

Part IV. 321

fequently to improve himfelf by help of
their gifts, their labour and knowledge, and
by their miftakes too. And as in every age
God has beftowed on the lovers of truth
fome knov^ledge of it, it is truly no eafy mat-
ter to colled: it all together: but when an
Expofitor does not fear ch in their writings for
what has been already beftowed on them
and may be found there but minds the text
only^ many things may remain hidden to his
eyes, and he may be long perplexed about
places that are cleared already by others.
For my part I have made the beft ufe of
them that I could 3 and I hope I am thereby
enabled to do others the better fervice.

PART VII.

CONSISTING of wholefome Ad-
monitions how to avoid all abufe and
miftake and to make a right and
profitable ufe of the foregoing, and
fuch like refledions on the propheti-
cal fcripturcs.

R r

322 Conclusion.

I. The events related in hiftory from St,
John's days to our times agree moft exadly
with this fublime Prophecy: by which agree-
mejit the truth of the word of God is moft
clearly and irrefragably proved againft all
Infidels \ ^^ truth oi \ki^ Chrifiian religion a-
gainft the "Jews, "Turks, &c. nay the truth of
the Evangelical religion 2.g2.in{i Popery.

Abbadie, not long before his death pub-
liili'd a large expofition of Ch. vi, vii, viii,
and ix, of the Revelation, entituled, The
triumph of Providence and Religion, as a Sup-
plement to his treatife of the truth of the
Chrifiian religion. Now all that he ad-
vanccth, in the beginning of his P' part, p.
1 6, againft the /coffers, and in the conclufion
of his IV'^ part, p. 663, againft i. \ht Hea-
then-, 2. the Jews y 3. \\-\Q Mahometans ', 4.
the Arians and Socinians ; 5. Roman-catho-
licks-, 6. Atheifis, Deifis, Sceptics and Infidels-,
all this, I fay might be built ftill ?7iore firmly
on the grounds of this prefent Expofition.

IL In the Revelation the holinefs of God
is amply difplayed y and therefore both the
expofitor and the reader of it ought to have
their hearts prepared to ftiew a holy fear and

Part VIL 323

becoming reverence. Whatever God

teacheth, that we ought to apply ourfelves
v^ith diligence to learn -, neither feeking for
more, nor contenting ourfelves with lefs :
and we ought alfo to apply it all to his glory
and our falvation^ and to the exciting of our
devotion ; and not waft all our labour on meer
knowledge-: But many deal with the Prophe-
cies as they do with an Enigma. Before
it is folved, they have a tickling impatience,
a longing expedlation, and an agreeable fo-
licitude about it: but as foon as it is folved,
they are weary oi tbis^ and want a new one.
And therefore we may fairly conclude that
if any man could at once give full and fatis-
faftory anfwers to all the queftions among
the learned, he would have little thanks
from them; for he would but only fpoil
their play and their paftime. But thofe
who receive the truth with due thankfulnefs
and refpeft, as foon as they come to the
knowledge of it apply it to ufe; and that par-
ticularly as well as in general.

III. Many men if they would exercife
themfelves more in meditating on the word
of God, his promifes, and his judgments.

324 Conclusion.

both in paft times and thofe that are yet to
come, would not find their labour in the
ufe of their faculties fo fmitlefs^ but would
hefe/i/iikofthe almighty Power, the good-
nefs and faithfulnefs of God, and find in
that fenfe more ftrength to overcome them-
felves and all either inward or outward op-
pofition than in the reftlefs agitation of their
own thoughts, Thofe Pfalms whofe begin-
ning often expreffeth the fenfe of the fharpeft
inward trouble and temptation, yet end in
a delightful defcant on the divine Oeconomy.
God has not exhibited his promiies to his
Church in vain: but if no one in particular
will chufe to enjoy the comfort of them, to
what purpofe are they recorded in the Scrip-
tures?

IV. Though our Forefathers, and th^ir
refifting even to blood the Frotejiant Church
has attained to the enjoyment of a liberty of
confciencey the high value of which thofe
fouls alone know how to prize who have
with difficulty efcaped the iron furnace of
Romiih fiavery. The enjoyment of this li-
berty many take to be their acknowledged
right and make ufe of it according to their

Part VIL 325
ikill and ability, not only for their own pri-
vate eafe and comfort, but alfo openly in all
their behaviour, converfation and writings;
and yet thefe very men do not fcruple incon-
fiderately to pronounce it ^//, one part with,
another, to be one mere Babel But though,
alas! there are diforders, too too many, in
all places; yet there is a great difference be-
tween other Churches and that which iri the
prophecy is called Babylon, As depraved as
Jerufalem was, yet it was no BabeL

— — __. On this head

we are taught, in the Revelation, to judge
not according to appearances but to judge 7'igh'
teous judgment ,

V. The times in which, one after ano-
ther, holy men's lot falls, are either thofe
near about the terms or boundaries^ when one
period is near run out and fomewhat elfe is
going to appear ; or middle times, in which
one or more generations may pafs without
any remarkable change. In middle times one
may be in fome meafure indifferent: but the

326 Conclusion.

times near the bounds require watchfulnefs,
and will make thofe watchful who are willing
to be awaked. The Ifraelites were to behave
themfelves, while they were in the midft of
their Egyptian flavery or Babylonian capti-
vity, in a manner very different from what
they were to do at the time of their going out
of Egypt, ^or return from Babylon.

VL Those who enterprize great, fine,
fpecious and important things ought not, 'tis
true, to fuffer themfelves to be difcouraged
from what they are well ajjured they have a
call to : but yet they ought to confider too,
what is or is not practicable at this time,
while there are yet fo many hellilli obftacles
in the way: left they fhould be icandalized
if they have not prefent fuccefs More

fach cautions are to be feen in the IV'^ and
V''' part of this conclufion.

VII. We are now to expeft soon, one
after another, the Calamities which the
OTHER Beast brings on for the fervice of
\!at firjl', the Harvest, and the Vin-
tage J the pouring out of the Vials ; the
Judgment of Babylon j the final
Rage of the Beast, and his Destruc-

Part VIL 327

TioN; and the Binding of Satan. O
how great are thefe T'hings ! how Jl:orf the
Time !

What is it then we ft and moft in need
of? Wisdom, Patience, Fidelity,
Watchfulness. It cannot^ it mujl not
be that we fhould continue fettled on our Lees.

This is no agreeable Meffage and Injunc-
tion to Flefh and Blood, if it be rightly " un-
derftood. The Wife^ the Mighty, the

tJoble oithis World are aftonifhed when they
are told there will soon be ^ great Change.
Nevertherlefs the things which Jhall be (Rev.

i. 19.) WILL BE.

VIII. What particularly the Numbers^
which in Daniel were fealed and w^ere firft
opened by means of the Revelation of Jesus
Christ, and alfo come out fo punctually;
what they^ I fay, may contribute to the con^
vi5lion of the Jews, is left to the confidera-
tion and the trial of thofc who are qualified
to underftand the Prophets and to deal with
the Jews. See Introd. §. xxviii at the end.

IX. Many do not regard fuch thinp-s as
thefe : and among others there are fo many '

f See Jerem. xlviii. u. and Zephan. i. 12.

328 Conclusion.

mifconceptions, fo many evafions and ob-
jedlions againft the whole or againft iovntpar-*
ticular points^ that when a Man thinks he
has difpatched ten of them, a hundred ftart
up in their ftead. Often indeed they them-
felves deflroy one another, but are of fuch
a nature that though they are eafy to be an-,
fwered jingly^ yet with their multitude they
would wear out any Perfon that would take
the trouble to anfwer them all.

Now I have laid all open to all the World.
He that cares not for it may let it alone :
He that can receive it^ let him receive it.

How majiy intportant things^ O Lord,
Jesus, in thy Revelation, lie open to
xkiy fight ^ which my dim eyes have overlookt !

Do thou out of thy Fulnefs fupply wherein
I am deficient, both for me and for others.

To thee he the Glory and the Power

for ever and ever !

SHORT

REMARKS

O R

MARGINAL ANNOTATIONS:

BEING A

Summary of the whole Exposition.

Chap. Verfe.
I. I — 7. )J(^^)!^HE mamificent T'k/e
jg^ T p^ of the book.
4—6. )^^^^ The adJrefs: which
gives this book the form of
an epi/lk.
7, 8. Kfummary of the whole book.
9 — 20. St. John relates in what manner
he was appointed for deliver-
ing this important prophecy.
Patmos lies in the midft of
thofe regions of the world in
which the prophecy is ful-
filled.

[2]

Chap. Verfe.

I. 13. From this majeftic defcription

of Jesus Christ are taken
his titles in the following
e^iftles to the feven Angels
of the {Q,vtn Churches.

II. 1. The feven Churches in Alia,

and efpecially their Angels^
are exhorted to repentance
and conftancy, and the com-
ing of the Lord notified to
them. To them that over^
come glorious things are pro-
mifed. The three firft

and the four laft addrefles,
> have a particular connexion
with one another.

III. 20. The coming of the Lord in

all thefe addrefles (excepting
only that to the Angel of the
church of Smyrna^ for a par-
ticular reafon) is notified as
nearer and nearer in. each of
them: therefore in this lafl
it is faid, Behold I am fiand-
ing at the door and knocking.

[3]

Chap. Verfe,
IV. I. Here begins the main vision
which extends to C. xxii. 5.
V. I, In the feven Seals which arc
opened quickly one after ano-
ther, is expreffed the giving
oi all power in heaven and in
earth to the Lamb.
VL I. The four firjl feals relate to
vifible things^ and reprefent
how all times of ( i.) Victory
and (2.) War, (3.) all the
feafons^ plenty and dearth and
(4.) all general calamities
are in the power of theLamb :
and of each of thefe zfajft-
ple is given in the reign of
Trajan, in the eaft, weft,
fouth and rorth.
9. The three latter feals relate to
invijible things: viz, the fifth
to the Saints depa?^ted 2ind the
Martyrs; the fixth to the
dead that are in mifery ; and
the feventh to the Angelsy

[4]

Chap. Verfe.

VI. 9. particularly thofe feven to

whom the feven trumpets
were given.
II. This chronos reaches from A.
D. 97 to A. D. 12085 when
to the Martyrs under heathen
Rome were added thofe under
the Romijh Papacy,

VII. 3 By this fealing, the chofenfeed

from among Ifrael were
preferved againft the follow-
ing Plagues.
9. Here is a multitude of fuch as
were gone out of this world
to a happy ftate in the other.
After this, more fuch multi-
tudes appear.
VIII. 6. Of the feven Angels, one af-
ter anotherfoundstheTRUM-
PETS given them: whereby
the ' Brake is applied to

• A Brake is an inftrument ufed in dreffing o^ fax, by
which that part of it which is of no other ufe but to be burnt
is by repeated firokes bruifed and crumbled, and fo prepared
to be readily feparated by the teeth of a ftrong comb from the
ufeful part, whereof linnen, of various degrees of fnenefs, is
made.

[5]

Chap. Verfe.
VIII. 6. the power of this world,
fo that at laft it muft all re-
vert to the dominion of Je-
sus Christ. The
whole prophecy and the com-
pletion of it always go on in
xhQ fame order together.
7. The trumpets of the (omv Jirjl
Angels have a particular con-
nexion with one another, and
relate to vifible things. The
trumpet of the p-Jl angel
was fulfilled, in the eaft,
by the great flaughter of
Jews in the IF century:
that of the fecond in the weft,
in the Iir century, by the
irruption of foreign nations:
of the t/jtrd, in the fouth,
in the IV'^ century, by the
Arian calamities: of
the fourth in the northern
region, in the V'*" century,
by the ruin of the Roman
empire.

[6]

Chap. Verfe.

VIII. 13. The trumpets of the three lajt
angels have a particular con-
nexion with one another, and
bring with them three woes
which run in a track from
eaft to weft. The fe-

cond broke out about the Eu-
phrates, xh^jirji farther
eaft, and the third in

the weft. The Jirji was

great; the fecond yet more
heavy: the third v^ov^ of all.
There is always an interval
between each two.
IX. 4. Those that 2iXtfealed are of the
tribes of the children of Ifrael:
thofe therefore that had not
the feal are the other Jews.
Thefe were at that time very
grievoufly oppreffed in Perfa^
where they had formerly been
very powerful.
5. Five prophetical months are
79 Years full, from A°* 510
to 589, after which it fared

[7]

Chap. Verfe.

IX. 5. better again with the Jews
in Perfia.

II. Abaddon, ApoIIyon: deftroyer.

13. The fecond wo is the killi?7g
of fuch numbers of men by
the Saracens.

15. A PROPHETICAL hour and a
day and a month and a year
make 207 years nearly; from
A°- 634 to 840.

20. Scarcely was the flaughter
made by the Saracens a httle
abated, but the worfiip of
images was firmly eftabliih'd
intheeaft A''- 842.
X. I.— XL 13. Here is a previous declaration
of the fcope of that moji im^
port ant trumpet oithtfeventh
angel.
X. 6. This non-chronos reaches from
the oath of the angel to the
binding of fatan.
XI. 2, 3. These 42 months, and thefe
1260 days are to be under-
ftood in theufual acceptation,

[81

Chap. Verfe.

XL 2, 3. and mean common months
and days 5 and are yet to
come. Yet the mentioning
them here fo long before is
in no wife ^ improper; fmce
the whole period of which
they are a part began before
the end of the fecond wo.
15. The trumpet of the feventh an-
gel extends from the middle
of the IX' ^century to the end
of the world: and we
are aBually under if.
XII. I. The prophecy does not begin
again anew at this place: we
are only fhewn how the trum-
pet of the feventh angel (the
contents of which were writ-
ten in C. XI. 15 — 18.) is
carried on from C. xi. 19.
XII. I. to C.xxii. 5; and that
the execution of it reaches
even into eternity. The

twelve liars are the twelve

* See Note p. 6.

[9]

Chap. Verfe.

XIL I . tribes of Ifrael at their convert
fion.

3. Satan has not been mentioned
from the beginning of C. iv.
i. e. in all this Vifion : but
now his appearance is fo
much the more horrible.

6* THESEI260 prophetical days are
657 years full, and contain
in them the church of Bohe-
mia from the planting of the
chriftian religion there A"'
864, 'till the breaking out
of the reformation A°* 1521.
At the end of the 1260 days
the Reformation begins: and
at the end of the 3 I times
the thoufand years begin.
The former of thefe revolu-
tions was a great one and a
good) the latter yet more
fo: and they are the one to
the other as the day-break
to the rifing of the fun.
12. This Wo is that thihd Wo.
B

[ 10]

Chap. Verfe.
XII. 12. The angel of the abyfs had
brought on xhtjirjl-^ and the
four angels by the Euphrates
when loofed, xhtfecond: Sa-
tan himfelf T2Li{cs the third.
The fhort time, or few kairoi,
makes 888 y years, as after-
ward the 3 4 times make
777 T y^^^s. Thefe two
periods begin the one before
the other, but end together.
In both of them is included
the number of the Beaft,
which makes 42 prophetical
months or 666 y years, as a
Chronos is 1 1 1 1 y years, and
two Chronoi or 2222 -f years
anAion oriEvum, C. xiv. 6.
The proof of this may befeen
in the LiiroduBion.
The third Wo, the 3 4- times
of the Woman, and the
times of the Beaft have been
in their courfe a long time,
are fo at present, and are
hafiening quickly to theiv End.

[ " ]

Chap. Verfe.

XII. 12. Toward this end that which

was previoully declared in
C. X, xi. will be fulfilled.
As /o us, the xiii'*" and xiv'^
chapters require our mojlferu
ous confideratioriy and NOW
is the peculiar time for us to
reap benefit from this pro-
phecy.

XIII. I. By the fea is underftood the

weft. Here the Hilde^

hrandine Papacy is defcribed,
from A°' 1077.

II. Tm^fecondBeaJiWiWi^o^ soon

break out with his horrible

abominations. Hereafter

he is feveral times called the

falfe Prophet,

XIV. 6. The voice of this Angel was

heard at the beginning of the
laft century; and that of hifn
who follow d himy about the
middle of it.
10, II. This is the inoji dreadful
lhreat?2i72g in all the holy

[ 12 ]

Chap. Verfe.

XIV. 14-20. fcriptures. See §. ix. of the

Preface.
The great Harvejl and the

great Vintage are near, at the

door.

XVI. I. The Vials of the four firjt,

and fo likewife the Vials of
the three laji Angels have (as
was the cafe in the trumpets)
a particular connexion with
one another. The trum-^
pets, fetching a lo7ig compafs^
aim their blow at a third party
and ftrike at the kingdom of
the world : but the ^/^A pro-
ceed j^^^^'^ and ftrike diredf-
ly at the whole. They chiefly
concern the Beaji^ as he has
infinuated himfelf into the
kingdom of the world or tem-
poral power.

XVII. 8. The duration of the Beaft is

here divided into three por-
tions : I. as he was in being
in the time of his number,
viz.42 months or 666 years.

Chap. Verfe.
XVIL 8. 2. as he 'is mf, but on the
contrary the Woman hz^fub-
duedtini rides upon theBeaft:
3. as he will rage at his latter
end, as the fpecial and very
ma?i of Sin 2Lndi fon of Perdi-
dition* What is here pro-
phefied concerning Babylon,
or Romey comes to pafs in
the middle or fecond portion,
which is yet to come. We
muil be careful to obfervc
the difference between the
Beajl and the Woman : and
alfo look for it in the proper
places.
9. Each Head' of the Beaft has
on/y one meani?ig; but the

-^ A Beaji (or rather n^}ild Beaft, 9>!^.o!/), both in Daniel
and here, is the Emblem of a Series or Succeffion of iMen
exercifmg a lawlefs arbitrary Power. Therefore when the
f^iver is gone, the B^ji is in ftria propriety faid not to be.

** The Pope (meaning by that word the ^hoU Series of
Popes from Bilddbrand to the Bon of Perdition, incluji've) is
the H.?fl^/ of that Beaft, ox King of theSubjefts of that Power.
pi|t as the Beaft is defcribed as having kvzn Heads, each
iignifying ^ King and alfo a Hill as the Seat or Throne of
his Kingdom ; the nvhole Series of Popes muft be divided into
feiven farts, each of which particular Series is one Head, that
is, one King, who reigns on his peculiar and appropriaie liiU.

[ Hi

Chap. Verfc.

XVII. 9. thing that is mea?if is a com-
founds viz. a king and a hill
together. The i'' head is
the reign of the pope on
Mount Ccelius^ in the Lateran\
the 2^ on the Vatican Mount %
the 3^ on the ^irinal-y the
4*'' on the Efquiline Mount y
where ftands Maria Maggi-
ore. The remaining three,
time will fliew us.
16. The Beast bimfe/fwith the
concurrence of the ten Kings
that adhere to him^ will make
the WnoRB defolate : She has
nothing to fear from the Pro-
testants.
XVIII. 4. This coming out of Babylon
will be a little before her
Plagues come upon her.
13. In the midft of the Greek text
ftands the Latin word Rheda^
for a Chariot: which hints at
Italy ', as the Chaldaic word
in the Hebrew text, Jerem. x.
II. does at the Chaldeans,

[ 15 ]

Chap. Verfe.

XIX. 2, Here the requeft of the Souls
under the altar, repeated in
their very words, is tranfpos'd
into a fong of rejoicing.
II. Here comes on the great
flaughter, in which the Bead
together with the falfe Pro-
phet arc deftroyed.

XX. I. Satan had a httle before (un-
der the third wo, fo late as
C. xvi. 13) committed an
enormous crime : and now,
after beholding the defolation
of Babylon and deftrucfbion
of the Beaft, he is bound and
imprifoned.
2. We muft carefully diftinguifh
between the two-fold 1000
years; the one mentioned in
verfe 2, 3, 73 and the other
in verfe 4, 5, 6.

XXI. I. The new Heaven and the new
Earth, together with the new
Jerufalem belong to eternity,
C. xxii. 5.

Chap. Verfe.

XXlL 6-21. This Conclufion of the Book
aiifwers in every part to the
Preliminaries.
lo, 11. An Expofitor alfo fhould be
fincere aftd a plain-dealer,
and not be moved with either
the gain-fayings of Scoffers
and Hypocrites, or the ill ufe
that may be made of the
Myfteries.
1 8, 19. Those alfo adJ and take away ^
who oppofe a well-grounded
and confcientious Revijion of
the original T^ext of this in-
eftimable Prophecy , and
frighten away People from
the ancient purity of it under
the Name of a dangerous
Innovation.
20. Learn, whoever you are that
hear this, to fay, — and fay
indeed heartily, Come.

THE END.

\ '-^ f^, <o

DATE DUE

tWL.l-V'^^

m^

Jiir

1 1 1 Kt . 1- J

m^r

ae»

SflfWPW!

9

jJUU

H 0 i^^o

CAYLORO

PRI»4TCOINUS.A.